Seat Mii 2018 User Manual

Owner’s manual

SEAT Mii

1SL012720BL

Inglés

1SL012720BL (11.18)

SEAT Mii Inglés (11.18)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,

that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no

right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or

omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

❀

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

Vehicle identiﬁcation data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification

number:

Date of vehicle registration

or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Conﬁrmation of receipt of documentation

and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered

with the vehicle:

YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was

checked

Location:

Date:

Signature of owner:

Introduction

Thank you f

or your trust choosing a SEAT v

hicl

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy

a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology

and top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-

ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle

so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily

driving.

Information about handling is complemented

with instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure

its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we

want to give you valuable advice and tips to

drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting

the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety infor-

mation concerning the passenger's

front airbag

›

››

page 66, Important in-

formation regarding the front passeng-

er's airbag.

About this manual

This manual describes the f

eat

es of the ve-

hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of

the features described below will be intro-

duced in the future or will only be available in

certain markets.

Some of the features described here are

not included in all the types or variations

of the model and they can be varied or

modified based on technical or marketing

requirements without it being considered

misleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary from

its vehicle and must be interpreted as a

standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,

backwards) in this manual refer to the travel

direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-

ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant to

help the users better understand some fea-

tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the

instruction manual. Access the instruction

manual to see the complete information and

warnings.

The features marked with an asterisk

are included by default only in certain

versions of the model, supplied as op-

tional only for certain versions or only of-

fered in certain countries.



Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-

sence of this symbol does not guarantee

that the term is not a trademark.

It indicates that the section continues on

the next page.

Important warnings on the page.

category

Weight of

the chil

Age

Group 0 up to 10 kg

up to approx. 9

months

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

up to approx. 18

months

Group 1 9 to 18 kg

approx. 8 months to

years

Group 2 15 to 25 kg 3 to 7 years approx.

Group 3 22 to 36 kg 6 to 12 years approx.

Not all children fit in the seat of their weight

oup

. Nor do all seats adapt t

o the vehicle.

Therefore, always check whether the child fits

properly in the child seat and whether the

seat can be installed safely in the vehicle.

Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44

regulation are fitted with the corresponding

approval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E

in a circle with the identification number be-

low it.

Use of the child seat on the front

passenger seat

Transporting children on the front passenger

seat is not permitt

ed in all countries. Further

mor

e, not all child seats are approved for use

on the front passenger seat. Your SEAT deal-

ership has an updated list of all approved

child seats. Only used child seats that are

approved for each vehicle.

The front airbag on the front passenger side

is highly dangerous for a child. The front pas-

senger seat is life-threatening to a child if he

or she is transported in a rear-facing child

seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the

front passenger seat, an inflating front airbag

can strike it with such great force that severe

or fatal injuries may result

›››

. Therefore,

ear

-f

acing child seats must never be placed

on the front passenger seat when the front

passenger front airbag is enabled.

Only use a rear-facing child seat on the front

passenger seat if the front passenger front

airbag is disabled. When it is disabled, the

yellow control lamp on the dash panel

     will be lit up

›››

page 60. If you cannot disable the front

passenger front airbag and it remains ac-

tivated, it is forbidden to transport children

on the front passenger seat

›››

Things t

o not

e if using a chil

d seat on the

front passenger seat:

●

The front passenger front airbag must be

disabled  when using a rear-facing child

seat

›››

page 60.

●

The seat backrest of the front passenger

seat must be upright.

●

The front passenger seat must be moved

as far back as possible.

●

A height-adjustable front passenger seat

must be raised to its highest point.

ECE-R: Economic Comission for E

urope Regu-

lation.

Compliance with current national legislation

and the manufacturer's instructions is required

when using or installing child seats.

Transporting children safely

Suitable child seats

The chil

d seat must be authorised by the

manuf

act

urer especially for use on a front

passenger seat with a front or side airbag.

Universal seats for children can be fitted in

the front passenger seat, in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2

or 3 according to the ECE-R 44 regulation.

WARNING

If a child seat is mounted on the front pas-

senger seat, the risk of the child sustaining

vere or fatal injuries in the event of an ac-

cident increases. Rear-facing child seats

must never be mounted on the front pas-

senger seat when the front passenger front

airbag is enabled. This is life-threatening to

the child should the front airbag deploy, as

the child seat would be struck by the infla-

ted airbag and thrown against the seat

backrest.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, a child

must be transport

ed in a rear-facing child

seat on the front passenger seat, strictly

observe the following:

●

Always disable the front passenger front

airbag and leave it disabled.

●

The child seat must be approved by the

manufacturer for use on a front passenger

seat with front and side airbag.

●

Follo

w the installation instructions of the

child seat manufacturer and observe the

warnings.

●

Move the front passenger seat as far

back as possible and adjust it to its highest

position to keep as far away as possible

from the front airbag.

●

Move the seat backrest to the upright po-

sition.

●

Children must always be protected with

an approved child restraint system suited

to their height and weight.

Use of the child seat on the rear

seat

If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat,

adapt the position of the fr

ont passenger

seat so that the chil

d has enough space

Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat to

the size of the child seat and the height of the

child. Ensure the passenger is in the correct

position 

›››

page 49.

Suitable child seats

The manufacturer must authorise the child

seat for use in the rear seats with side air-

bags.

Universal seats for children can be fitted in

the passenger seat, in groups 0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3

according to the ECE-R 44 regulation.

The rear seats are suitable for child seats with

the ISOFIX system specially designed for this

type of vehicle in accordance with regulation

ECE-R 44.

ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats

ISOFIX child seats are divided into the follow-

ing certified categories: “universal”, “semi-

universal” or “specific categories for the vehi-

cle”.

●

If the ISOFIX child seat is certified “univer-

sal”, it must be supported by the lower an-

chor points and the Top Tether retaining

strap.

●

If the ISOFIX child seat is certified “semi-uni-

versal” or “specific categories for the vehi-

cle”, check that the child seat is certified for

the vehicle before employing it. The child

seat manufacturer supplies, in addition to the

ISOFIX child seat, a list of vehicles for which

the corresponding ISOFIX child seat has been

certified. If necessary, contact the child seat

manufacturer for an updated list of vehicles.

Emergencies

Self

-help

In case of emer

gency

First aid kit, w

arning triangle and

fire extinguishers*

Fig. 77

In the boot: storage compartment for

the w

arning triangl

Warning triangle

In some v

ehicl

e equipment it is possibl

e to

store the warning triangle model shown in a

storage compartment of the luggage com-

partment

›››

Fig. 77.

First-aid kit

The first aid kit must comply with legal re-

quirements. Check the expiry date of the

contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher

A fire extinguisher can be stored in a holder in

the passenger seat footwell.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legal

requirements, be ready for use and be

checked regularly. Check the certification

seal on the extinguisher.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be

violently thro

wn in case of a sudden ma-

noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-

dents causing serious injury.

●

Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aid

kit, reflective vests and warning triangle

securely in the vehicle.

Vehicle tool kit*

Intr

oduction

When securing the vehicle in case of a break-

wn, pl

ease not

e the legal requirements for

each country.

Vehicle tool kit

For vehicles with a factory-fitted spare wheel

or temporary spare wheel, in addition to win-

ter wheels, the luggage compartment may

contain additional vehicle tools

›››

page 71.

WARNING

When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set

and spare wheel are l

oose in the interior

they can be violently thrown in case of a

sudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-

cially in accidents, causing serious injury.

●

Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre

mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-

rary spare wheel are safely secured in the

luggage compartment.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can

cause injury or accidents.

●

Never work with inappropriate or dam-

aged tools.

Self-help

Location

Fig. 78

In the boot: carpet raised.

The vehicle tool kit, spare wheel, temporary

spar

e wheel and the t

e mobility set are

stored in the luggage compartment under

the carpeted floor panel

›››

Fig. 78.

●

If necessary, remove the boot variable floor

›››

page 122.

●

Raise the carpet at the recess (arrow)

›››

Fig. 78.

Note

After use, return the jack to its initial posi-

tion using the handle in order t

o securely

store it in the vehicle.

Accessing the vehicle tool kit and

e mobilit

y system in vehicles fit-

ted with the SEAT SOUND 7 speaker

system (with subwoofer)*

●

Open the boot hatch and lift the shelf.

●

If necessary, remove the boot variable floor

›››

page 125.

●

Lift up the carpet from the recess and re-

move it from the luggage compartment.

●

Disconnect the subwoofer’s speaker cable.

●

Completely remove the hand-controlled

wheel from the centre of the sub

woofer

speaker by turning it anti-clockwise.

●

Take out the subwoofer, which is on top of

the tools and tyre mobility system.

●

When finished, place the tools and system

back in the same way and place as before to

ensure the speaker sits properly in its housing.

●

Place the subwoofer in the direction of the

arrow and with the word “FRONT” facing for-

ward.

●

Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-

tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the

subwoofer is firmly in place.

Components

Fig. 79

Components of the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle

equipment. The f

oll

wing is a description for

a vehicle with all options.

Individual elements of the vehicle tool kit

›››

Fig. 79

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the

handle for screwing and unscrewing the

wheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is inter-

changeable. The screwdriver may be

found underneath the wheel spanner.

Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recom-

mend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in

the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code

number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is

stamped on the front of the adapter. In

Emergencies

case it is lost, another adapter can be or-

der

ed using this number

. Not

e the anti-

theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it

in a place other than the vehicle.

Towline anchorage, removable.

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover,

integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt

caps.

Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool kit,

fold its hook. The crank must then be fol-

ded tight against the side of the jack in

order for it to be safely stored.

Wheel spanner.

Wheel bolt cap clips.

Note

The jack does not generally require any

maintenance. If r

equired, it should be

greased using universal type grease.

Changing a wheel

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 37

Some vehicle versions and models do not

have a factory-fitted jack or box spanner. In

this case, we recommend consulting a Speci-

alised workshop to change the wheel.

You should only change the wheels yourself if

the v

ehicl

e is park

ed in a safe place, you are

familiar with the procedure and safety stand-

ards and you have all the necessary tools!

Otherwise, you should seek professional as-

sistance.

WARNING

Changing a wheel can be dangerous, es-

pecially on the hard shoulder

. Please ob-

serve the following rules to minimise the

risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park at a safe distance from surround-

ing traffic to change a wheel.

●

When changing a wheel, keep all pas-

sengers, and particularly children, a safe

distance away from the work area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is

flat and solid. If necessary, support the

jack on a wide solid base.

●

If you are changing a wheel yourself, you

should be familiar with the required proce-

dure. Otherwise, you should seek profes-

sional assistance.

●

Only use suitable tools that are not dam-

aged when changing a wheel.

●

Always stop the engine, apply the hand-

brake lever firmly and place the selector

lever in position N, or engage a gear for a

manual gearbox to reduce the risk of the

vehicle mo

ving accidentally.

●

Have the tightening torque of the wheel

bolts checked as soon as possible with a

reliable torque wrench.

WARNING

If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not

fitt

ed correctly, they coul

d cause major

accidents or damage.

●

Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may

come off while driving and endanger other

road users.

●

Damaged trims must never be mounted

on the wheels.

●

Always ensure that the brake ventilation

and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is

also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there

is not enough air, you may require signifi-

cantly longer braking distances.

CAUTION

Remove and remount wheel trims taking

care to av

oid damage to the vehicle.

Self-help

Tyre repair

MS (T

e Mobility System)*

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 36

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)

will reliably seal punctures caused by the

penetration of a foreign body of up to about

4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign

objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,

you must again check the tyre pressure

about 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if the

vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-

miliar with the procedure and you have the

necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you

should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following

cases:

●

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

●

In outside temperatures below -20°C

(-4°F).

●

In the event of cuts or perforations in the

tyre gr

eater than 4 mm.

●

If you have been driving with very low pres-

sure or a completely flat tyre.

●

If the sealant bottle has passed its use by

date.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-

gerous, especially when filling the tyr

e at

the roadside. Please observe the following

rules to minimise the risk of injury:

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-

rounding traffic to fill the tyre.

●

Ensure the ground on which you park is

flat and solid.

●

All passengers and particularly children

must keep a safe distance from the work

area.

●

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn

other road users.

●

Use the tyre mobility system only if you

are familiar with the necessary procedures.

Otherwise, you should seek professional

assistance.

●

The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-

porary emergency use only until you can

reach the nearest specialised workshop.

●

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre

mobility set as soon as possible.

●

The sealant is a health hazard and must

be cleaned immediately if it comes into

contact with the skin.

●

Always keep the tyre mobility set out of

the reach of small children.

●

Never use an equiv

alent jack, even if it

has been approved for your vehicle.

●

Always stop the engine, apply the hand-

brake lever firmly and engage gear if using

a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the

risk of vehicle involuntary movement.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the

same perf

ormance proper

ties as a conven-

tional tyre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking

and fast cornering.

●

Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum

speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check

the tyre.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-

ing any legal requir

ements.

Note

●

A new bottle of seal

ant can be purchased

at SEAT dealerships.

●

Take into account the separate instruc-

tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu-

facturer.

Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility sys-

em*

Fig. 80

Standard display: contents of the anti-

punct

e kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath

the fl

oor co

ering in the luggage compart-

ment. It includes the following components

›››

Fig. 80:

Tyre valve remover

A sticker to be adhered to the instrument

cluster, within the driver's visual field, to

remind that the maximum advisable

speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ube f

or infl

ating tyres

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-

toring system

Air bleed screw

ON/OFF switch

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover

has a gap at

the l

er end for a valve insert. The valve in-

sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this

way. This also applies to its replacement part

WARNING

When inflating the wheel, the air compres-

sor and the inflator t

ube may become hot.

●

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

●

Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube

or hot air compressor on flammable mate-

rial.

●

Allow them to cool before storing the de-

vice.

●

If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at

least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is

too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a

good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-

tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTION

Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-

mum of 8 oper

ational minutes t

o avoid

overheating! Before switching on the air

compressor again, let it cool for several mi-

nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube

›

Fig. 80

again

and check the pr

essur

e on the gauge

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP

a) and l

wer:

●

Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be

sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.

●

You should obtain professional assistance

›››

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kP

a) and higher:

●

Set the t

e pressure to the correct value

again

›››

page 206.

●

Carefully resume your journey until you

reach the nearest specialised workshop with-

out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).

It can also be integrated in the compressor.

In its place, the compressor may have a button.

Self-help

●

Hav

e the damaged t

e replaced.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous

and can cause accidents and serious in-

jury.

●

Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-

sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and l

ower.

●

Seek specialist assistance.

Changing the windscreen

wiper bl

ades

Changing the windscr

een and r

ear

window wiper blades

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 47.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as

standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is

responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.

If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of

the water as it is wiped across the windscreen

will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-

ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass

they should be changed if they are dam-

aged, or cleaned if they are dirty

›››

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced

immediat

ely. These ar

e av

ailable from quali-

fied workshops.

WARNING

Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-

duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-

dent and serious injury.

●

ways replace damaged or worn wind-

screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-

ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION

●

Damaged or dirty windscr

een wipers

could scratch the glass.

●

If products containing solvents, rough

sponges or sharp objects are used to clean

the blades, the graphite layer will be dam-

aged.

●

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint

thinner or similar products to clean the win-

dows.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage to the bonnet and the

wiper arms, only leave them in the service

position.

●

Before driving, always lower the wiper

arms.

Note

If wax deposits, other cleaning products

from the automatic car w

ash, or other care

products, are left on the windscreen and

the rear window, the blades can scratch

the glass. Remove wax deposits with a spe-

cial product or cleaning cloths.

Tow-starting and towing

Instructions for to

w-starting

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 43.

When towing or tow starting, respect the le-

gal requirements.

For technical reasons, it is not possible to

tow a vehicle if the battery is flat.

In general, the vehicle should not be star-

ted by towing. Jump-starting is much more

preferable

›››



page 44.

For technical reasons, the following vehicles

can not be tow started:

●

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

●

If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possible that

the engine control unit does not operate cor-

rectly.

Emergencies

However, if your vehicle must absolutely

be t

w-st

arted (manual gearbox):

●

Put it into second or third gear.

●

Keep the clutch pressed down.

●

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-

ing lights.

●

Release the clutch when both vehicles are

moving.

●

As soon as the engine starts, press the

clutch and move the gear lever into neutral.

This helps to prevent a collision with the tow-

ing vehicle.

WARNING

A vehicle with a flat battery should never

be tow

ed.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition

lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock

could suddenly lock. The vehicle would not

be controlled and a serious accident could

ensue.

WARNING

When towing the vehicle, the handling and

braking efficiency change considerably.

ease observe the following instructions

to minimise the risk of serious accidents

and injury:

●

As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

–

The brake must be depressed must

harder as the brake servo does not op-

erate. Always remain aware to avoid

collision with the towing v

ehicle.

–

More strength is required at the steer-

ing wheel as the power steering does

not operate when the engine is switch-

ed off.

●

As the driver of the towing vehicle:

–

Accelerate gently and carefully.

–

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

–

Brake well in advance than usual and

brake gently.

CAUTION

●

When tow-st

arting, fuel could enter the

catalytic converter and damage it.

●

Carefully fit and remove the towline an-

chorage and its cover to avoid damage to

the vehicle (e.g. paintwork).

●

When towing, fuel could enter the cata-

lytic converter and cause damage!

Note

Fitting a towline anchorage to the rear

bumper is not possible. The v

ehicle is not

suitable for towing other vehicles.

Advice for towing the vehicle

Towing vehicles with an automatic gear-

box

Note the f

ollowing for a towed vehicle:

●

Make sure the gear selector lever is in the N

position.

●

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph)

when towing a vehicle.

●

Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles).

●

If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle

must be tow

ed with the front wheels raised.

Situations in which a vehicle should not be

towed

In the following cases, the vehicle should not

be towed but transported on a trailer or spe-

cial vehicle:

●

If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lu-

bricant due to a fault.

●

If the battery is flat and the steering cannot

be unlocked as a result, the electronic steer-

ing lock and electronic parking brake cannot

be disengaged.

●

If the vehicle to be towed has an automatic

gearbox and the distance to be covered is

greater than 50 km (30 miles).

Self-help

Note

The vehicle can only be towed if the steer-

ing lock electr

onic gearbox lock is deacti-

vated. If the vehicle has no power supply or

there is an electric system fault, the engine

must be started using jump leads to deacti-

vate the steering column electronic gear-

box lock.

Fitting the front towline anchorage

Fig. 81

On the right-hand side of the front

bumper: r

emo

e the lid.

Fig. 82 On the right-hand side of the front

bumper: screw the anchor

age.

The location for the removable tow ring is on

the right

-hand side of the fr

ont bumper be-

hind a co

ver

›››

Fig. 81.

The towline anchorage should always be

kept in the vehicle.

Note the instructions for towing

›››

page 76.

Fitting the towline anchorage

●

Take the towline anchorage from the vehi-

cle tool kit in the luggage compartment

›››

page 70.

●

Press the upper part of the cover

›››

Fig. 81

(arrow) to disengage and release the cover.

●

Remove the cover and leave it hanging

from the vehicle.

●

Screw in the tow ring into its housing anti-

clockwise as far as it will go

›››

Fig. 82

›››

Use a suit

abl

e t

ool to firmly tighten the tow-

line anchorage in its location.

●

After towing, remove the tow ring by turning

it clockwise.

●

Place the cover's upper tab on the opening

of the bumper and carefully guide the lower

tab on the edge of the opening. If necessary,

press the lower tab from below.

●

Press the lower area of the cover until the

lower tab engages in the bumper.

CAUTION

The towline anchorage must always be

completely and firmly tight

ened. Other-

wise, it could be released while towing and

tow-starting.

Emergency locking and un-

ocking

Intr

oduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-

ually and partially opened, f

or e

ample if the

key or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can

cause serious injury.

●

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the

doors and windows cannot be opened from

the inside

Emergencies

●

Never l

eave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the rear

lid is danger

ous and can lead t

o serious in-

jury.

●

Open and close the doors and the rear lid

only when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTION

When opening and closing in an emergen-

cy, carefully disassemble components and

then r

eassemble them carefully to avoid

damage to the vehicle.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Intr

oduction

Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse

assignments based on equipment and the

use of the same fuse for various el

ectrical

components, it is not possible to provide an

up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for

the electrical components at the time of

printing this manual. For detailed information

about the fuse positions, please consult a

technical service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various

electrical components. Likewise, an electrical

component can be protected by several

fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the

problem has been solved. If a newly inserted

fuse blows after a short time, you must have

the electrical system checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system

can give serious electrical shocks, causing

burns and e

ven death!

●

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

●

Take car

e not to cause short circuits in

the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or

bridging a curr

ent circuit without fuses can

cause a fir

e and serious injury.

●

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only

replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) and

size.

●

Never repair a fuse.

●

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-

ple or similar.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage to the vehicle's elec-

tric system, before replacing a fuse always

turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-

trical elements and remove the key from

the ignition.

●

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating

fuse, you could cause damage to another

part of the electrical system.

●

Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-

vent the entry of dust or humidity as they

can damage the electrical system.

Note

●

One component may have more than one

fuse

Fuses and bulbs

●

Sever

al components may run on a single

fuse.

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 83

Under the dashboard on the driver

side: lid of the fuse bo

Fig. 84 In the engine compartment: lid of the

fuse bo

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 35

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same

amperage (same colour and markings) and

size.

Opening and closing the fuse box situated

below the dash panel

●

Open: Press the unlock button

›››

Fig. 83

until it is possible to open the cover. Fold the

er do

wn.

●

Close: Fold the cover up in the opposite di-

rection to the arrow until it clicks into the lock-

ing lever

o open the engine compar

tment fuse bo

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

●

Press the attachment tabs in the direction

indicated by the arrow (thin arrows) to re-

lease the fuse box cover

›››

Fig. 84.

●

Then lift the cover out.

●

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.

Push the attachment tabs down, in the oppo-

site direction indicated by the arrow until they

click audibly into place.

CAUTION

●

Always car

efully remove the fuse box

covers and refit them correctly to avoid

problems with your vehicle.

●

Protect the fuse bo

xes when open to

avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and

humidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-

age to the electrical system.

Note

In the vehicle, there are more fuses than

those indicat

ed in this chapter

. These

should only be changed by a specialised

workshop.

Changing bulbs

Intr

oduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of

manual skill. If you ar

e unsur

, SEAT recom-

mends that you consult a technical service or

request assistance from a specialist. In gen-

eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to the

bulbs, other vehicle components require re-

moval.

You should store spare light bulbs in the vehi-

cle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs

may be obtained from the technical services.

In some countries, it is a legal requirement to

carry spare bulbs in the vehicle.

Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the ve-

hicle exterior lighting is against the law.

Emergencies

Additional bulb specifications

The specifications of some headl

amp bulbs

and bulbs f

or the r

ear lamps fitted at the fac-

tory may be different to those of conventional

bulbs. Bulb information is displayed on the

bulb socket or on the bulb itself.

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is

not clearly visible t

o other drivers, there is

a risk of accident.

WARNING

Failure to replace bulbs correctly may

cause serious accidents.

●

Before carrying out any work in the en-

gine compartment please r

ead and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 193. In any ve-

hicle, the engine compartment is a hazard-

ous area and could cause severe injury.

●

The bulbs H4, HB4 and H7 are pressurised

and might explode on changing them.

●

Only replace the bulbs concerned when

they have cooled.

●

Never replace bulbs alone if you are not

familiar with the operations necessary. If

you are not sure about procedures then vis-

it a specialised workshop to carry out the

necessary work.

●

Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fin-

gerprints will be evaporated by the heat of

the operating bulb thus “fogging” up the

reflect

or.

●

The headlamp frameworks in the engine

compartment and the rear lamps contain

sharp elements. Always protect your hands

when changing bulbs.

CAUTION

●

Aft

er changing a bulb, if the rubber co

ers are not replaced correctly on the head-

lamp framework, the electrical installation

may be damaged, especially if water is al-

lowed to enter.

●

Remove the ignition key before working

on the electric system. Otherwise, a short

circuit could occur.

●

Switch off the lights and the parking light

before changing a bulb.

●

Take good care to avoid damaging any

components.

Replacing the bulbs in the head-

lights

Fig. 85

In the engine compartment: Rear view

of the fr

ont l

eft headlight with rubber co

ver:

dipped beam and main beam headlights,

side lights and daytime driving lights and

turn signal

Fig. 86

Left headlight

There is no need to remove the headlight to

epl

ace bulbs.

Fuses and bulbs

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en:

Dipped beam and main beam headlights

Fig. 85

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

Remove the bulb connector H4. Remove the

rubber cover using the t

abs.

Press the retaining clip

›››

Fig. 86

down-

wards in the dir

ection of the arrow, unclip side-

ways, and remove it.

Remove the bulb from the holder. If necessary,

press the lock on the bulb hol

der.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Insert the bulb, r

eturn it to its position and insert

the retaining clip

›››

Fig. 86

Place the rubber cover and check that is in the

correct position. Insert the connector t

o the

bulb H4.

Side light and daytime lights Fig. 85

Front turn indicat

or Fig. 85

1. Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

Turn the bulb holder in an anticlockwise di-

rection

as far as it will go and remove it, along

with the bulb, pulling backwards.

Remove the bulb from the holder. If necessary,

press the lock on the bulb hol

der.

Side light and daytime lights Fig. 85

Front turn indicat

or Fig. 85

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Insert the bulb holder in the headlight and t

urn

it clockwise as f

ar as the stop.

Note

The images show the left hand headlight

from behind. The structur

e of the right hand

side headlight is symmetric.

Replacing the front bumper bulbs

Fig. 87 In the front right arch trim: remove the

aining scr

ews (arrows) and take out the ex-

pansive rivet

Fig. 88 Changing the bulbs in the headlights

Complete operations only in the se-

quence given:

Unscre

w the 2 retaining screws of the wheel

arch trim

››

›

Fig. 87 (arrows) with the screwdriv-

er from the vehicle took kit

›››

page 70.

Unscrew the expansive rivet in the lower front

part of the wheel arch trim

with the screw-

driver from the v

ehicle tool kit and completely

remove it

›››

page 70.

3. Carefully fold the wheel arch trim to the side.

Release the connector

›››

Fig. 88

and re-

move it.

urn the bulb holder

›››

Fig. 88 in the direction

of the arrow, in an anticlockwise direction as

far as it will go and remove it, along with the

bulb, pulling backwards.

Emergencies

Complete operations only in the se-

quence given:

Repl

ace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Insert the bulb holder in the headlight and t

urn

it clockwise as f

ar as the stop.

Plug the connector

into the bulb holder. The

connector must audibly click into pl

ace.

9. Replace the wheel arch trim into its position.

10.

Place the expansive rivet in the wheel arch trim

and bumper and press it complet

ely inwards

›››

Fig. 87

11.

Securely screw the 2 retaining screws

›

››

Fig. 87 (arrows) with a screwdriver.

Changing the bulbs in the rear

lights

Fig. 89

On the side of the luggage compart-

ment: A: r

emo

e the cover, B: remove the tail

lights.

Fig. 90 Tail light unit: C: remove the bulb hold-

, D: r

emo

ve the bulbs.

Complete operations only in the sequence

giv

en.

emo

ving the rear light units

1. Open the rear lid

›››

page 99.

Carefully remove the cover

towards the lever

›››

Fig. 89 A.

Pull from the lock

in the connector

in the

direction of the arro

›››

Fig. 89 B. Use the

screwdriver from the on-board tools.

Press position

and remove the connector

›››

Fig. 89 B.

Fuses and bulbs

5. Unscrew the wing nut

›››

Fig. 89 B.

Remove the tail light from the bodywork by

carefully pulling backwar

ds.

Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a

flat, clean surf

ace.

To change the bulb

Unlock the bulb holder locking tab (arrow)

›››

Fig. 90 C and remove the bulb holder from

the tail light.

Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb

›››

Fig. 90 D.

10.

Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit. The

attachment tabs (arr

ow) should audibly click

into place

›››

Fig. 90 C.

Assembling the rear light units

11.

Carefully insert the tail light unit into the open-

ing in the bodywork.

12.

Support the t

ail light with one hand in the as-

sembly position and securely scre

w the wing

nut with the other

›››

Fig. 89 B.

13.

Ensure that the tail light unit has been correctly

fitted and is firmly secured.

14.

Insert the connector

into the bulb holder

and press the lock

on the connector in the

opposite direction t

o the arrow

›››

Fig. 89 B.

15.

Insert the cover. The cover should lock into

place.

16. Close the rear lid

›››

page 99.

Changing the number plate light

Fig. 91

In the rear bumper: remove the plate

light.

Fig. 92

Number plate light: detach the bulb

hol

der

Complete operations only in the se-

quence given:

With one hand, press on the number pl

ate light

from left t

o right and remove it from the bumper

›››

Fig. 91.

Detach the number plate light carefully from

the bumper.

Turn the bulb hol

der with the bulb anticlock-

wise

and remove it in the direction of the arrow

›››

Fig. 92.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

Place the bulb hol

der in the number plate light

and press in the opposite dir

ection to the arrow

as far as possible

›››

Fig. 92.

Insert the number plate light carefully into the

left edge of the opening on the bumper. During

this process, check that the assembly direction

of the number plate light is correct, i.e. the

spring must be on the right.

Insert the number plate light into the bumper

until it audibly clicks into place.

Emergencies

Changing the side turn signal bulb

Fig. 93

Removing the side turn signal

Fig. 94

Side turn light: bulb change.

Complete operations only in the se-

quence given:

With one hand mov

e the side turn signal back-

wards

›

››

Fig. 93

Remove the side turn signal from the chassis by

leverage

Complete operations only in the se-

quence given:

Remo

ve the bulb holder with the bulb in the di-

rection of the arro

›››

Fig. 94

Remove the bulb holder bulb in a straight direc-

tion.

Replace the faulty bulb with a new identical

bulb.

6. Inst

all the bulb holder.

Place the side turn signal on the chassis on the

side situated t

owards the rear of the vehicle until

the spring clicks into the other side of the side

turn signal.

Operation

Fig. 95 Dash panel

General instrument panel

Operation

Gener

al instrument panel

Instrument panel

Key to Fig. 95:

Door release l

ever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Turn switch for adjusting the exterior

mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

–

Exterior mirror adjustment

–

Ext

erior mirror heating

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Lever for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

–

Turn signals and main beam

headlights

–

Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 171

Steering wheel with horn and

–

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 27

Windscreen wiper/ windscreen

wash lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

–

Windscreen wipers

–

Rear window wiper

–

er with buttons for controlling

the SEAT information system

- , / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Controls for:

–

Start-Stop system button . . . . . . . . . 170

–

Rear window heating button . . . . . . 129

–

Left seat heating controls . . . . . . . . . 113

Switches for:

–

Heating and fresh air system . . . . . . 129

–

Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 129

–

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Radio (factory fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Controls for:

–

Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . 70

–

Passenger front airbag off warn-

ing lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

–

Right seat heating controls

or rear window heating button

(alternative position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113, 129

Storage compartment with drink

holder in the centre console . . . . . . . . . 119

Handle of the storage compartment

or storage compartment open

. . . . . 115

In the side of the dash panel: Key

switch for switching off the front

passenger airbag

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Position of passenger front airbag

on the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 60

Ashtr

ay*

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

12 volt socket or cigarette light-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120, 120

Lever for:

–

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

–

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Button for:

–

City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . 174

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Steering column adjustment lev-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Buttons for operating the front elec-

tric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

According to version

Operation

Instruments

Vie

w of instrument panel

Fig. 96 Instrument panel, on the instrument panel: variant 1 (A) and variant 2 (B).

Details of the instruments

›

Fig. 96:

Speedometer. Depending on the

vehicle in km/h or in mph.

Displays on the screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).

–

Press the button 0.0/SET

briefly

o s

wit

ch the trip odometer and

odometer.

–

ess the 0.

0/SET f

or 5 seconds

o r

eset the odometer to zero and,

where necessary, other indicators

on the multifunction display. . . . . . . 24

Fuel reserve display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Revolution counter (with the en-

gine running, in thousands of revo-

lutions per minute).

The beginning of the red zone of the

rev counter indicates the maximum

speed in any gear after running-in

and with the engine hot. Ho

ver, it

is advisable to change up a gear or

move the selector lever to D (or lift

your foot off the accelerator) before

the needle reaches the red zone

›››

ock set butt

–

If necessary, change the time dis-

play by pressing the top and

General instrument panel

bottom buttons of the rocker

wit

›

››



Fig. 34

–

ess the

 butt

on to change the

hour, so that it is flashing.

–

To continue setting the time, press

button 0.0/SET

. Hold button down

o scr

oll thr

ough the numbers

quickly.

–

Press the  button again to

change the minutes, so that it

flashes.

–

To continue setting the time, press

button 0.0/SET

. Hold button down

o scr

oll thr

ough the numbers

quickly.

–

Press the  button again to end

the clock setting.

CAUTION

●

When the engine is cold, avoid high r

evs

and heavy acceleration and do not make

the engine work hard.

●

To prevent damage to the engine, the rev

counter needle should only remain in the

red zone for a short period of time.

For the sake of the environment

Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel

consumption and noise.

Indications on the display

A variety of information can be viewed on the

instrument panel display

››

›

Fig. 96

, de-

pending on the vehicle equipment:

●

arning and information messages.

●

Odometer.

●

Time.

●

Outside temperature.

●

Selector lever positions

›››

page 158.

●

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

›››

page 158.

●

Multifunction display (MFI)

›››



page 24

●

Service interval display

›››

page 90.

●

Start-Stop system status display

›››

page 170.

●

Fuel gauge

›››

page 189.

●

Seat belt status display for rear seats

›››

page 53.

Warning and information messages

The system runs a check on certain compo-

nents and functions when the ignition is

switched on and while the vehicle is moving.

Faults in the operation are displayed on the

screen using red and yellow symbols on the

instrument panel display (

›››



page 27)

and, in some cases, with audible warnings.

The display may vary according to the type

of instrument panel fitted.

Priority 1 warning (red symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.



Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous

›››

Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If nec-

essary, request assistance from specialised person-

nel.

Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible

warnings.

A fault

y function, or fluids which are below the cor-

rect levels may cause damage to the vehicle!

›››

Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If nec-

essary, request assistance fr

om specialised person-

nel.

Odometer

The od

omet

registers the total distance

travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance

travelled since the last odometer reset. The

last figure indicates 100 m.

Outside temperature indicator!

When the outside temperature is below +4°C

(+39°F), the “ice crystal” symbol (warning of

risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the

temperature. At first this symbol flashes and

then it remains lit until the outside tempera-

ture rises above +6°C (+43°F)

›››

Operation

When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at

ery l

w speeds, the temperature displayed

may be slightly higher than the actual out-

side temperature as a result of heat coming

from the engine.

The temperatures measured range from

-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Selector lever position

The range of engaged gears of the selector

lever is shown on the side of the lever, and on

the instrument panel display. In positions D

and M, and with the Tiptronic, the corre-

sponding gear is also indicated on the dis-

play.

Recommended gear* (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear to save fuel can be

displayed on the instrument panel display

while you are driving

›››

page 158.

Seat belt status display for the rear seats*

The seat belt status display on the instrument

panel display informs the driver, when the ig-

nition is switched on, whether any passen-

gers in the rear seats have fastened their seat

belts

›››

page 53.

Start-Stop system status display

The instrument panel display shows informa-

tion on the current status

›››

page 170.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

●

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-

dent for the driver and for other road users.

If necessary, switch on the hazard warning

lamps and put out the warning triangle to

advise other drivers.

●

Park the vehicle away from traffic and

ensure that no highly flammable materials

are under the vehicle that could come into

contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry

grass, fuel).

WARNING

Even though outside temperatures are

above fr

eezing, some roads and bridges

may be icy.

●

At outside temperatures above +4°C

(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal sym-

bol” is not visible, there may still be patch-

es of ice on the road.

●

Do not rely on the outside temperature

indicator!

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may result in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

Note

●

Different v

ersions of the instrument panel

are available and therefore the versions

and instructions on the display may vary.

●

When several warnings are active at the

same time, the symbols are shown succes-

sively for a few seconds and will stay on

until the fault is rectified.

Service interval display

The inspection message appears on the in-

strument panel displ

›

Fig. 96

SEAT distinguishes betw

een services

with

en-

gine oil change (Oil Change Service) and

services without engine oil change (Inspec-

tion Service). The service interval display only

gives information for service dates which in-

volve an engine oil change. The dates of the

remaining services (e.g. the next Inspection

Service or change of brake fluid) are listed on

the label attached to the door strut, or in the

Maintenance Programme.

The set service intervals have been specified

with the service dependent on time/dis-

tance travelled.

General instrument panel

Inspection reminder

If the inspection period is due t

o e

xpir

e short-

ly, Inspection reminder appears when start-

ing the ignition abbreviated to  and a

warning in km. The number of kilometres

shown is the maximum number that may be

driven until the next service.

Service due

After the service date, an audible warning is

given when the ignition is switched on and the

abbreviation  displayed on the screen

flashes for a few seconds.

Inspection of compressed natural gas

tanks (CNG) reminder

When less than 90 days for the review of the

compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when

the ignition is switched on, the instrument

panel display will a reminder for review of

the gas tanks and an audible warning will be

emitted.

As approaches the service date of inspection

of the gas tanks, the message and the audi-

ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Note

●

The service message disappears after a

w seconds, when the engine is started or

when OK

is pressed on the windscreen

wiper lev

er.

●

In vehicles whose batt

eries have been

disconnected for a long period of time, it

will not be possible to calculate the next

service date. Therefore the service interval

display may not be correct. In this case,

bear in mind the maximum service intervals

permitted

›››

page 217.

●

If the period of 48 months for an inspec-

tion at a specialised workshop of com-

pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-

ded, the vehicle may not working in this

mode.

Operation

Opening and closing

ehicl

e k

ey set

Remote control vehicle key*

Fig. 97 Remote control key

Remote control key

With the v

ehicl

e k

ey the vehicle may be

locked or unlocked remotely

›››

page 94.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-

tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

cle. The range of the vehicle key with remote

control and new battery is several metres

around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle

using the remote control key, this should be

re-synchronised

›››

page 94 or the battery

changed

›››

page 93.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may

be used.

Folding the key shaft in and out

When the button is pressed

›››

Fig. 97

, the

ey shaft is r

eased and unfolds.

To fold it press the button and fold the key

shaft in until it locks in place.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,

the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and

be coded with the data from the vehicle elec-

tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work

if it does not contain a microchip or the mi-

crochip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be

obtained from a SEAT dealership, a Special-

ised workshop or approved key service quali-

fied to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised

before use

›››

page 94.

WARNING

Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys

may result in sev

ere injury and accident.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. Children and

unauthorised individuals could lock the

doors or the boot hatch, start the engine or

turn on the ignition, activating el

ectrical

systems, the electric windows, for example.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year,

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

CAUTION

The remote control key contains electronic

components. Protect them fr

om damage,

impacts and humidity.

Note

●

Only use the key button when you r

equire

the corresponding function. Pushing the

button unnecessarily could accidentally

unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is

also possible even when you are outside

the radius of action.

●

Remote control key operation can be

greatly influenced by overlapping radio

signals around the vehicle working in the

Opening and closing

same range of frequencies (for example,

radio transmitt

ers, mobile telephones).

●

Obstacles between the remote control

and the vehicle, bad weather conditions

and draining batteries can considerably re-

duce the range of the remote control.

●

If the buttons of the vehicle key are

pressed

›››

Fig. 97 or one of the central

locking buttons

›››

page 94 is pressed re-

peatedly in quick succession, the central

locking briefly disconnects as protection

against overloading. The vehicle is then un-

locked. Lock it if necessary.

Mechanical vehicle key

Fig. 98

Vehicle mechanical key

The vehicle key set may include a mechani-

cal k

›

Fig. 98.

Duplicate keys

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,

the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and

be coded with the data from the vehicle elec-

tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work

if it does not contain a microchip or the mi-

crochip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be

obtained from a SEAT dealership, a special-

ised workshop or an approved locksmith

qualified to create them.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

Fig. 99

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed,

the contr

ol l

amp fl

ashes

›››

Fig. 99 (arrow)

once briefly. If the button is pressed and held,

the indicator blinks several times, for exam-

ple: for the convenience opening function.

When the control lamp does not light upon

pushing a button, the vehicle key batteries

must be changed

›››

page 93.

Replacing the battery

Fig. 100 Vehicle key: battery compartment

Fig. 101 Vehicle key: remove the battery.

Operation

SEAT recommend having the batteries

changed in a specialised w

orkshop

The batt

ery is located to the rear of the vehi-

cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 92.

●

Remove the cover from the back of the ve-

hicle key

›››

Fig. 100 in the direction of the ar-

row

›››

●

Extract the battery from the compartment

using a suit

abl

e thin ob

ject

›››

Fig. 101.

●

Place the new battery in the compartment,

pressing in the direction of the arrow as

shown

›››

Fig. 101

›››

●

Fit the battery compartment cover, press-

ing in the dir

ection of the arr

w as shown

›››

Fig. 100 until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

●

If the battery is not changed correctly,

the v

ehicle key may be damaged.

●

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage

the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-

place the dead battery with another of the

same voltage, size and specifications.

●

When fitting the battery, check that the

polarity is correct.

For the sake of the environment

Please dispose of your used batteries cor-

rectly and with respect f

or the environ-

ment.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the  button is pressed fr

equently outside

of the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-

hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-

ing the key. In this case, the vehicle key must

be synchronised once more as follows:

●

Unfold the vehicle key blade

›››

page 92.

●

Press the  button on the vehicle key. For

this, it must remain with the vehicle.

●

Open the vehicle within one minute using

the key shaft.

●

Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key.

The key has been synchronised.

●

If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking* and locking

system

Introduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 10

Central locking functions correctly when all

the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If

the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be

locked with the key.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked for

a long period (e.g. in a private garage) may

run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the central locking

system may cause serious injuries.

●

The central l

ocking system will lock all

doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can

prevent any non-authorised individual from

opening the doors and accessing the vehi-

cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or

accident, locked doors will complicate ac-

cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-

sengers.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. The central locking

button can be used to lock all the doors

from within. Therefore, passengers will be

locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked

in the vehicle can be exposed to very high

or very low temperatures.

●

Depending on the time of the year, tem-

peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-

cle can be extremely high or extremely low

resulting in serious injuries and illness or

even death, particularly for young children.

●

Never leave individuals locked in a closed

and locked vehicle. In case of emergency,

Opening and closing

they may not be able to exit the vehicle by

themselves or get help

Description of the central locking

system

The central locking system allows all doors

and the rear lid to be l

ocked and unlocked

centrally.

●

From outside, using the vehicle key.

●

From inside, by pushing the central locking

button

››

›

page 97.

The central locking system can be activated

or deactivated at a specialised workshop.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central lock-

ing system fault, all doors can be locked or

unlocked manually.

Locking the vehicle after the airbags have

been deployed

If the airbags are deployed due to an acci-

dent, the vehicle will be automatically and

completely unlocked. Depending on the

amount of damage, it can be locked follow-

ing an accident in the following ways:

Function Necessary operations

Lock the vehi-

cle,

by push-

ing the central

locking but-

ton:

– Turn off the ignition and turn it on

again.

– Push the central locking button

.

Use the key to

lock the v

ehi-

cle:

– Turn off the ignition and turn it on

again.

OR: Remove the key from the igni-

tion.

– Open any door just once.

– Lock the vehicle with the key.

Note

If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed

›››

page 92 or one of the central locking

buttons

›››

Fig. 104 is pressed repeatedly in

short succession, the central locking brief-

ly disconnects as protection against over-

loading. In this case, the vehicle remains

unlocked for about 30 seconds. If no door

nor the rear lid is opened during this time,

the vehicle will then automatically lock.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

om outside

Fig. 102

Buttons on the vehicle key

Fig. 103 Vehicle mechanical key

Central locking

Function Handling the buttons on the

vehicle

›

››

Fig. 102

Unlocking the

vehicle

Press button .

Operation

Function Handling the buttons on the

vehicle

›

››

Fig. 102

Lock the vehi-

cle.

ess button .

Unlocking the

rear lid.

Press butt

on .

Locking the

rear lid.

Press butt

on .

Function Handling the vehicle key

›››

Fig. 102 in the lock cylin-

der or with the vehicle me-

chanical key

›››

Fig. 103.

Unlocking the

vehicle

Insert the vehicle key into the lock

cylinder of the driver door and turn

the key in an anticlockwise di-

rection.

Lock the vehi-

cle.

Insert the v

ehicle key into the lock

cylinder of the driver door and turn

the key in a clockwise direction.

Unlocking the

rear lid.

Insert the vehicl

e key into the lock

cylinder of the driver door and turn

the key in an anticlockwise di-

rection.

Locking the

rear lid.

Insert the vehicle key into the lock

cylinder of the driver door and turn

the key in a clockwise direction.

Warning: in accor

dance with the centr

ocking function set by a specialised work-

shop, in order to unlock all the doors and the

rear lid, press the  button twice.

The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the

vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if

the battery has enough power.

●

Upon locking the vehicle, all turn signals will

flash once in confirmation.

●

Upon unlocking the vehicle, all turn signals

will flash twice in confirmation.

If the turn signals do not flash in confirmation,

at least one of the doors or the rear lid has

been left unlocked.

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot

be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehi-

cle without opening any doors or the rear lid,

it will lock again automatically after a few

seconds. This function prevents the vehicle

from remaining unlocked if the unlocking but-

ton is pressed by mistake.

Mechanical locking

Function

Using the vehicle's me-

chanical key

››

›

Fig. 103 in

the lock cylinder

Locking the

driver door

manually.

unlock, insert the vehicle key

into the l

ock cylinder of the driver

door and turn the key in an anti-

clockwise direction.

To lock, insert the vehicle key into

the lock cylinder of the driv

door and turn the key in a clock-

wise direction.

Function

Using the vehicle's me-

chanical key

››

›

Fig. 103 in

the lock cylinder

Locking and un-

locking the rear

lid.

o unlock, insert the vehicle key

into the l

ock cylinder of the driver

door and turn the key in an anti-

clockwise direction.

To lock, insert the vehicle key into

the lock cylinder of the driv

door and turn the key in a clock-

wise direction.

If the driver's door is open, it cannot be

ock

ed with the v

ehicle key.

Opening and closing

Locking or unlocking the vehicle

om the inside

Fig. 104

On the driver's door: central locking

butt

on.

Fig. 105

On the passenger door: door handle

or mechanical l

ocking.

Central locking

Push the button

›››

Fig. 104:



Unlocking the vehicle.



Locking the vehicle.

The central locking button is still operative

when the ignition is switched off

If the vehicle has been locked with the vehicle

key, the central locking button does not oper-

ate.

Please note the following when you use the

central locking button to lock your vehicle:

●

The "Safe" security system will not activate

›

››

page 97.

●

It will not be possible to open the doors or

the rear lid from the outside. This may offer

extra safety, for example when stopped at

traffic lights.

●

The doors can be opened and unlocked in-

dividually from the inside by pulling the door

handle. If necessary, pull the door release

lever twice.

●

The driver door cannot be locked when

open. This avoids locking the vehicle key in-

side the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

Mechanical locking

The doors are locked by pressing the door

lever, so that the red mark becomes visible

›››

Fig. 105

o unl

ock a door

, pull its corresponding door

lever.

If the vehicle becomes locked, take note of

the following:

●

The "Safe" security system will not activate

›››

page 97.

●

It will not be possible to open the doors

from the outside, when stopped at traffic

lights for example.

●

The doors can be opened and unlocked in-

dividually from the inside by pulling the door

handle.

●

The driver door cannot be locked using the

central locking system when it is still open.

This avoids locking the vehicle key inside the

vehicle when there is nobody inside.

Safe security system “Safe”*

Function Necessary operations

Lock the vehicle and

activate the “Saf

e”

security system.

Press the  button once on

the vehicle key.

Operation

Function Necessary operations

Lock the vehicle with-

out activ

ating the

“Saf

e” securit

y sys-

tem.

Press the  button on the

vehicl

e key twice.

Press the central locking

button  on the driv

er door

once.

When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-

ty system deactiv

ates the door handles, pre-

venting people from opening the vehicle. The

doors cannot be opened from inside

›››

Upon switching off the ignition, the instrument

panel displ

ay will show that the “deadlock” is

activated or (SAFELOCK or SAFELOCK).

When the “Safe” security system is deac-

tivated, the following occurs:

●

The vehicle can be opened and unlocked

from the inside using an inside door handle

Control lamp on the driver door

When the vehicle is

locked:

Meaning

The r

ed LED flashes for ap-

proximat

ely 2 seconds at

short intervals and then

more slowly.

The "Safe" security

system is switched

on.

The red LED flashes for

about two seconds then

turns off

. After 30 seconds,

the LED flashes again.

The "Safe" security

system is switched

off.

When the vehicle is

locked:

Meaning

The r

ed LED flashes for

about two seconds at short

interv

als. Subsequently, the

light will remain switched on

for about 30 seconds.

There is a fault in the

locking system. Con-

tact a specialised

workshop.

WARNING

Careless use of the "Safe" security system

can cause serious injury.

●

Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if

it has been locked using the k

ey. When the

"Safe" security system is activated, doors

cannot be opened from the inside!

●

When the doors are locked, it is difficult

to get to passengers in the vehicle interior

in case of an emergency. Passengers could

remain trapped inside and unable to unlock

the doors in case of an emergency.

Doors

Intr

oduction

WARNING

If a door is not correctly closed, it could

open unexpectedly when driving and cause

serious injuries.

●

Always st

op immediately and close the

door.

●

When closing, ensure that the door has

closed correctly. A closed door should be

flush with the corresponding parts of the

bodywork.

●

Open and close doors only when nobody

is in the way of the door.

WARNING

A door held open by its retainer could be

own cl

osed by the wind or close if the ve-

hicle is on a hill, causing injury.

●

When opening and closing doors, always

use the door handle.

Childproof lock

Fig. 106 Childproof lock on the left hand side

door

Opening and closing

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors

om being opened fr

om the inside

. This sys-

tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-

cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicle

electronic opening and locking systems. It

only affects rear doors. It can only be activa-

ted and deactivated manually, as described

below:

Activating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childproof

lock.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the left-hand side doors

›››

Fig. 106 and

clockwise for the right-hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock

–

Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-

vate.

–

With the door open, rotate the groove in the

door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise

for the right-hand side doors, and clock-

wise for the left-hand side doors

›››

Fig. 106.

Once the childproof lock is activated, the

door can only be opened from the outside.

The childproof lock can be activated or de-

activated by inserting the key in the groove

when the door is open, as described above.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening

and closing of the rear lid can cause acci-

dents and serious injury.

●

Open and cl

ose the rear lid only when

nobody is in the way.

●

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it

down with your hand on the rear window.

This could break and cause injury.

●

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing,

otherwise, it may open unexpectedly while

driving. A closed rear lid should be flush

with the corresponding parts of the body-

work.

●

Always keep the rear lid closed while

driving to avoid toxic gases entering the ve-

hicle interior.

●

Do not open the rear lid when there is a

load installed, for example a carrier sys-

tem. Likewise, the boot hatch cannot be

opened when a load is attached to it, for

example bicycles. An open rear lid could

close itself if there is an additional weight

on it. If necessary, press down on the rear

lid and remov

e the load.

●

Close and lock both the rear lid and all

the other doors when you are not using the

vehicle. Ensure that nobody remains inside

the vehicle.

●

Never allow children to play inside or

around the vehicle without supervision, es-

pecially if the rear lid is open. Children

could enter the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid and become trapped. De-

pending on the time of the year, tempera-

tures inside a locked and closed vehicle

can be extremely high or extremely low re-

sulting in serious injuries and illness or even

death, particularly for young children.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. If the vehicle key or the

central locking button is used, they may be

locked in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Before opening the rear lid, ensure that

there is sufficient free space t

o open and

close it, for example if you are in a garage.

Operation

Opening the rear lid

Fig. 107

On the vehicle key: button to unlock

and open the boot hat

ch.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 11

If bicycles are attached to a rack on the boot

hatch, for example, in some cases, it may not

open automatically

›››

. Remove the load

om the carrier and support the open r

ear lid.

Opening with centr

al locking

●

Press the  button on the vehicle key

›››

Fig. 107 for about one second to unlock

the rear lid.

●

OR: Press the  button on the vehicle key

until the rear lid opens automatically several

centimetres.

●

Opening the rear lid with the button.

Opening with the vehicle mechanical key

●

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder

of the driver door and turn the key in an anti-

clockwise direction

›››

page 94.

●

Opening the rear lid with the button.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless unlocking and open-

ing of the rear lid could cause serious inju-

ries.

●

If ther

e is a loaded luggage carrier on the

rear lid, it could be unlocked or open but

not recognised as such. An unlocked or

open rear lid could open unexpectedly

while driving.

Note

At outside temperatures of less than 0°C

(+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannot

alw

ays automatically lift the rear lid. In this

case, open the rear lid manually.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 108

Rear lid open: space for pulling.

Closing the rear lid

●

Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid

›

Fig. 108 (arrow).

●

Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in-

to place in the lock.

●

Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling

on it firmly.

Locking the rear lid with central locking*

If you unlock the vehicle without opening any

doors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto-

matically after about 30 seconds. This func-

tion prevents the vehicle from remaining un-

locked if the unlocking button is pressed by

mistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is

correctly and fully closed.

100

Opening and closing

●

The r

ear lid is al

so l

ocked by a central lock-

ing.

●

If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked

using the  button of the vehicle key, when it

is closed again it will lock automatically.

●

A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-

tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h

(6 mph).

Locking the rear lid with the vehicle me-

chanical key

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is

correctly and fully closed.

●

Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinder

of the driver door and turn the key in a clock-

wise direction

›››

page 94.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking

of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

●

ver leave the vehicle unattended, or

allow children to play inside or around the

vehicle without supervision, especially if

the rear lid is open. Children could enter

the luggage compartment, close the rear

lid and become trapped. A locked vehicle

can be subjected to extremely high and low

temperatures, depending on the time of

year, thus causing serious injuries/illness

and even death.

Note

Before closing the rear lid, make sure that

the key has not been left inside the luggage

compar

tment.

Controls for the windows

Opening and closing the windows

ectrically

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 13

WARNING

Careless use of the electric windows can

cause serious injury.

●

Only operate the electric windows when

nobody is in the way.

●

Nev

er leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be

locked. The windows cannot be opened in

case of an emergency.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. After turning off

the ignition, the windows can be opened

and closed for a short time using the but-

tons on the door as long as the driver door

or passenger side door is not open.

CAUTION

When the windows are open, rain can enter

the vehicle

, dampening the interior equip-

ment and causing damage to the vehicle.

Side-opening rear windows

Fig. 109 Lever to open and close the rear win-

Opening

Pull the r

ease l

ever in the direction of arrow

and press outward until the lever engages.

osing

Pull the r

ease lever in the direction of arrow

and then press the lever backward until it

engages.

101

Operation

Sliding/tilting electric pan-

amic sunr

oof

Opening and cl

osing the panoram-

ic sunroof

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 13

The sliding/tilting sunroof only works when

switched on. After switching off, it is still possi-

ble to open or close the sliding/tilting sunroof

during a short space of time provided that

neither the driver nor passenger door is

opened.

All operations are interrupted when the rotary

knob is actuated.

If it were not possible to close the sliding/tilt-

ing sunroof electrically, it would need to be

closed manually. It is not possible to do an

emergency close of the sliding/tilting sunroof

without removing components of the vehicle.

In such a case, obtain professional assis-

tance.

Sliding blind

With the roof grab handle situated in the rear

part of the roof opening, it is possible to move

the sliding blind to the required position.

WARNING

If the sliding/tilting electric panoramic sun-

roof is used negligently or without paying

due attention, it can cause serious injury.

●

The sliding/tilting sunr

oof should only be

opened or closed when no one is blocking

its path.

●

After switching off, it is still possible to

open or close the sliding/tilting sunroof

during a short space of time provided that

neither the driver nor passenger door is

opened.

CAUTION

●

To pre

vent damage, when there are win-

ter temperatures any ice or snow that there

may be on the roof of the vehicle must be

removed before opening or raising the slid-

ing/tilting electric panoramic sunroof.

●

Before leaving the vehicle or in the case

of heavy rain, the sliding/tilting sunroof

must always be closed. With the slid-

ing/tilting sunroof open or raised, water

can enter the passenger compartment and

can cause considerable damage to the

electrical system. As a result, other dam-

age can occur in the vehicle.

●

In the case of heavy rain, if the slid-

ing/tilting sunroof is open, the interior

equipment of the vehicle may get wet, de-

stroying the seat heating and damaging

the electrical system of the vehicle.

Note

●

Leaves and other l

oose objects that land

in the guides of the sliding/tilting sunroof

should be removed periodically by hand or

using a vacuum cleaner.

●

If the sliding/tilting sunroof does not work

correctly, the anti-trap function will not

work either. In this case, you should take

the vehicle to a specialised workshop.

●

The convenience position permits suffi-

cient ventilation with a level of sound pro-

duced by low wind.

Anti-trap function of the slid-

ing/tilting el

ectric panor

amic sun-

oof

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of

injury when cl

osing the sliding/tilting el

ectric

panor

amic sunroof

›››

. If the sliding/tilting

sunr

oof encount

ers r

esistance or an obstacle

when closing, it will immediately reopen.

●

Check why the sliding/tilting sunroof has

not closed.

●

Try to close it again.

●

If it is still not possible to close it due to an

obstacle or resistance, it will remain in the

corresponding position. Close it without the

anti-trap function.

102

Lights and visibility

Closing the sliding/tilting electric panor-

amic sunr

oof without the anti-tr

ap func-

tion

●

Within about 5 seconds of activ

ating the

anti-trap function, pull knob

›››



Fig. 13

until the sliding/tilting sunroof is fully closed.

●

As such, the sliding/tilting sunroof will

ose without the anti-tr

ap function!

●

If the sunr

oof still cannot be closed, visit a

specialised workshop.

If the knob is released during the closing op-

eration, the sliding/tilting electric panoramic

sunroof opens automatically.

WARNING

Closing the sliding/tilting electric panor-

amic sunroof without the anti-trap function

can r

esult in serious injury.

●

The sliding/tilting sunroof should always

be closed carefully.

●

No person should ever remain in the way

of the sliding/tilting sunroof, especially

when closing without the anti-trap func-

tion.

●

The anti-trap function does not prevent

fingers or other parts of the body from be-

coming trapped against the roof frame and

injuries occurring.

Lights and visibility

Lights

Contr

ol l

amps



It lights up

Rear fog light switched on

›››

page 22.



It lights up

Left or right turn signal.

The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a vehicle

turn signal is fault

y. If necessary, check the vehicle's

lights.



It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on

›››

page 105.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 27.

Switching lights on and off

Fig. 110

On the side of the steering wheel: dia-

am of some of the t

ypes of light s

witch

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 22

The driver is personally responsible for the

correct use and adjustment of the lights in all

situations.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that

the lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver

door is open, an audible warning signal is

heard in the following cases: this will remind

you to turn the light off.

●

When the light switch is in position .

●

When the light switch is in position .

103

Operation

WARNING

The side lights or daytime running lights

are not bright enough to illuminat

e the road

ahead and to ensure that other road users

are able to see you.

●

Always use your dipped beam head

lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and not

used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or

distr

acting other road users. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

Always make sure that the headlights are

correctly adjusted.

Note

The legal requirements regarding the use

of vehicle lights in each country must be

observ

ed.

Light and visibility: functions

Parking light remains on both sides

If when s

wit

ching off the ignition, the light

contr

ol remains in the position  and the ve-

hicle is closed from outside, both headlights,

in addition to the side lights and the rear

lights will light up.

Daytime running lights

The daytime driving light consists of individu-

al lights in the front headlamps.

When the daytime driving light is switched on,

only the individual lights come on

›››

The daytime lights ar

e s

wit

ched on each time

the ignition is turned on if the light setting is in

position  or in position .

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is

not clearly visible t

o other drivers, an acci-

dent may occur.

●

Never use the daytime driving light if the

road is not well-lit as a result of the weath-

er conditions and poor visibility. The day-

time driving lights are not bright enough to

illuminate the road ahead and to ensure

that other road users are able to see you.

●

The rear lights do not come on with the

daytime driving light. A vehicle which does

not have the rear lights on may not be visi-

ble to other drivers in the darkness, if it is

raining or in conditions of poor visibility.

Note

The headlights, rear lights and turn signals

may mist up temporarily on the inside in

cool or damp w

eather. This is normal and in

no way effects the useful life of the vehicle

lighting system.

Automatic dipped beam control



*

The automatic dipped beam control is merely

intended as an aid and is not able t

o recog-

nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the

vehicle lights and the instrument panel and

switch lighting switch on and off automatical-

ly in the following situations

›››

in Light and

visibility: functions on page 104:

Automatic switch-

ing on

Automatic switch-

ing off

The photo sensor de-

tects darkness

, for exam-

ple, when driving through

a tunnel.

When adequate lighting

is detected.

The rain sensor detects

rain and activat

es the

windscreen wipers.

When the windscreen

wipers have been inac-

tive for a few minutes.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road

users cannot see the vehicle w

ell enough

or at all, accidents may occur.

●

The automatic dipped beam control

() only switches on the dipped beam

when there are no changes in brightness,

and not, for example when it is foggy.

104

Lights and visibility

“Coming home” and “Leaving

home” function (guidance lights)

The “Coming Home” and “Leaving Home”

function lights up the vehicle

’s immediate

proximity when getting into and out of it in the

dark.

The “Coming home” function is switched on

manually. However, the “Leaving home” func-

tion is automatically controlled by a rain and

light sensor.

Activating the “Coming Home” function

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Activates the headlight flasher for approx. 1

second

›››



page 23.

When the driver door is opened, the “Coming

Home” lighting comes on. The delay in

switching off the headlights is counted from

when the last door or rear lid of the vehicle is

closed.

Deactivating the “Coming Home” function

●

It is automatically deactivated once the

time set for the light switch-off delay has

elapsed.

●

OR: it is automatically deactivated if, 30

seconds after the function has been activa-

ted, any vehicle door or the rear lid is still

open.

●

OR: rotate the light switch to position .

●

OR: switch on the ignition.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function

●

Unlock the vehicle (the light switch must be

at the  position and the rain and light sen-

sor must detect darkness).

Deactivating the “Leaving Home” function

●

It is automatically deactivated once the

light switch-off delay time has elapsed.

●

OR: lock the vehicle.

●

OR: rotate the light switch to position .

●

OR: switch on the ignition.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 23

Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move the

lever as far as possible upwards or down-

wards and release the lever. The turn signal

will flash 3 times.

The convenience indicators can be deactiva-

ted at a Specialised workshop.

WARNING

Improper or lack of use of the turn signals,

or forgetting t

o deactivate them can con-

fuse other road users. This could result in a

serious accident.

●

Always give warning when you are going

to change lane

, overtake or when turning,

activating the turn signal in good time.

●

As soon as you have finished changing

lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn

signal off.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause

accidents and serious injury, as the main

beam may distr

act or dazzle other driv

ers.

Note

●

If the convenience turn signal

s are oper-

ating (three flashes) and the other conven-

ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-

tive part stops flashing and only flashes

once in the new part selected.

●

The turn signal only works when the igni-

tion is switched on. The hazard warning

lights also work when the ignition is switch-

ed off

›››

page 70.

●

If any of both turn signals fails, the warn-

ing lamp will start flashing twice faster

than normal.

●

The main beam headlights can only be

switched on if the dipped beam headlights

are already on.

105

Operation

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 111

Instrument panel: button for switching

the haz

d lights w

arning system on and off.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 23

Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a

broken down vehicle. In a number of countries

it is now obligatory, for example, to turn on the

hazard warning lights and use a reflective

safety vest

›››

page 70.

If your vehicle breaks down:

Park the vehicle a safe distance from

traffic and on suitable ground

›››

urn on the haz

d warning lights with

the  button

›››

Fig. 111.

Apply the handbrake firmly

›››

page 151.

Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the

selector lever in position N

›››

page 158.

Switch off the engine and remove the

key from the ignition.

Have all occupants leave the vehicle

and move to safety, for example behind

a guard rail.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys

with you.

Place an emergency warning triangle to

indicate the position of your vehicle to

other road users.

Allow the engine to cool and check if a

specialist is required.

When being towed with the hazard warning

lights on, a change in direction or traffic lane

can be indicated as usual using the turn sig-

nal lever. The hazard lights will be interrupted

temporarily.

If the hazard warning lights are not working,

you must use an alternative method of draw-

ing attention to your vehicle. This method

must comply with traffic legislation.

WARNING

A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk

of accident for the driver and f

or other road

users.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble. Park the vehicle a safe distance from

surrounding traffic to lock all the doors in

case of an emergency. Turn on the hazard

warning lights to warn other road users.

●

Never l

eave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be

locked. In case of an emergency, passen-

gers will be trapped inside the vehicle. Indi-

viduals locked in the vehicle can be ex-

posed to very high or very low tempera-

tures.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

each very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as dried

grass or fuel).

Note

●

The vehicle batt

ery will discharge and

run down if the hazard warning lights re-

main on for too long (even with the ignition

turned off).

●

In some vehicles, the brake lights will

flash when braking abruptly at speeds of

approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn

vehicles travelling behind. If braking con-

tinues, the hazard warning lights system

will automatically be turned on at a speed

of less than approximately 10 km/h

(6 mph). The brake lights remain lit. Upon

accelerating, the hazard warning lights will

be automatically turned off.

106

Lights and visibility

Adjusting the headlights

In those countries where vehicles drive on the

other side of the road to the home country,

the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzl

drivers of oncoming vehicles.

For this reason, stickers may be needed to

cover the headlights when driving abroad.

For further information, please refer to a spe-

cialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting

a technical service.

Note

The use of stickers to cover headlights is

only permitted ov

er a short period. To mod-

ify the direction of the headlamps more

permanently, please take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop. SEAT recommends

taking your car in for technical service.

Headlight range control, lighting of

the instrument panel and contr

Fig. 112

Next to the steering wheel: Headlight

ange contr

Headlamp height adjustment

The headlight r

ange contr

›

››

Fig. 112 is

modified according to the value of the head-

light beam and the vehicle load status. This

offers the driver optimum visibility and the

headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers

›››

The headlights can only be adjust

ed when

the dipped beam is s

wit

ched on.

To reset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 112:

Value Vehicle load status



Two front occupants, luggage compart-

ment empty

To reset, turn switch

›››

Fig. 112:

Value Vehicle load status



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment empty



All seats occupied, luggage compart-

ment full.



Driver only, luggage compartment full

If the vehicle load does not correspond to those

sho

wn in the tabl

e, it is possible to select intermediary

positions.

Instrument and switch lighting

When the side lights or dipped beam head-

lights are switched on, the lighting for instru-

ments and controls lights up at a constant

brightness.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the back of vehicle may

cause headlight dazzle and distract other

driv

ers. This could result in a serious acci-

dent.

●

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load

status so that it does not blind other driv-

ers.

107

Operation

Luggage compartment light

The light is activated when the rear lid is

open, even when the ignition and lights ar

turned off. For this reason, ensure that the

rear lid is always closed.

Visibility

Sun visors

Fig. 113

Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-

senger sun visors:

●

Lower the sun visor towards the wind-

scr

een.

●

The sun visor can be pull

ed out of its

mounting and t

urned towards the door.

●

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-

tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror*

There may be a vanity mirror in the folded sun

visor on the passenger side and a cardholder

in the driver sun visor.

WARNING

Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility.

●

Always roll or fold sun blinds and visors

away when not in use.

Heat-insulating glass windscreen

Fig. 114 Windscreen with reflective infrared

and met

al coating and small windo

w (r

ed sur-

face)

The heat-insulating windscreens include a re-

ectiv

e infr

ared coating. The section above

the rear vision mirror has been left uncoated

(communication window) to allow electric

components from the accessories shop to

operate correctly

›››

Fig. 114.

CAUTION

When the uncoated surface is covered or

has a sticker on the interior or e

xterior, mal-

functions in the electronic components

may occur. Never cover the uncoated sur-

face on the interior or exterior.

Windscreen wiper and win-

dow wiper systems

Windo

w wiper lever

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 24

WARNING

Water from the windscreen washer water

bottle may free

ze on the windscreen if it

does not contain enough anti-freeze, re-

ducing forward visibility.

●

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer

contains enough anti-freeze.

●

In cold conditions, you should not use the

wash/wipe system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-

tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on

the windscreen and reduce visibility.

108

Lights and visibility

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility

and increase the risk of accident and seri-

ous injury.

●

Alw

ays replace damaged or worn blades

or blades which do not clean the wind-

screen correctly.

CAUTION

In icy conditions, always check that the

wiper blades are not fr

ozen to the glass be-

fore using the wipers for the first time. In

cold weather, it may help to leave the vehi-

cle parked with the wipers in service posi-

tion

›››



page 46.

CAUTION

If the ignition is switched off while the wind-

screen wipers are on, the windscr

een wip-

ers carry on wiping at the same level when

the ignition is switched back on. Ice, snow

and other obstacles may damage the

windscreen wiper and the respective mo-

tor.

●

If necessary, remove snow and ice from

the windscreen wipers before starting your

journey.

●

Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-

ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-

icer spray for this operation.

Note

●

The windscreen wipers will only work

when the ignition is s

witched on.

●

The interval wipe speed varies according

to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle

is moving, the more often the windscreen is

cleaned.

●

The rear wiper is automatically switched

on when the windscreen wiper is on and the

car is in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-

ent situations

If the vehicl

e is at a

standstill

The activat

ed position provi-

sionally changes to the previ-

ous position.

For intermittent

wipers

Intervals between wipes de-

pend on the vehicle

's speed.

The higher the vehicle speed

the shorter the intervals.

Note

The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-

cles that are on the windscr

een. The wiper

will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its

path. Remove the obstacle and switch the

wiper back on again.

Rain and light sensor

Fig. 115

Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the

ain sensor

Fig. 116 Rain sensor reference surface.

When activated, the rain and light sensor au-

omatically contr

s the windscreen washer

intervals depending on the intensity of the

rainfall.

109

Operation

When the rain and light sensor is deactivated,

the dur

ation of the int

erv

als is adjusted to set

levels.

Activating and deactivating the rain and

light sensor

Move the lever to the required position

›››

Fig. 115:

●

Position

- The rain and light sensor is de-

activ

ed.

●

osition

- The rain and light sensor is ac-

tiv

ed will wipe aut

omatically as needed.

When the ignition is switched off and then

back on again, the rain sensor stays on and

starts operating again when the windscreen

wipers are in position

and the vehicle is

elling at mor

e than 4 km/h (2 mph).

Setting the sensitivity level of the rain and

light sensor

The sensitivity of the rain and light sensor can

be adjusted manually with the control

the windscr

een wiper l

ver

›››

●

Move the control to the right: high sensitivi-

●

e the control to the left: low sensitivity.

Malfunction of the rain and light sensor

Some examples of possible causes of faults

and mistaken readings on the reference sur-

face

›››

Fig. 116

of the rain and light sen-

sor:

●

Wiper blades in poor condition: the pr

es-

ence of a film or strips of w

er caused by

damaged blades may cause the windscreen

wipers to be slower taking effect, shorten

wiping intervals or cause wiping to be fast

and continuous.

●

Insects: mosquitoes impacting the wind-

screen can activate the windscreen wiper.

●

Traces of salt: in winter, the windscreen

wiper may work for longer than usual due to

the presence of traces of salt on the almost

dry windscreen.

●

Dirt: the presence of dry dust, wax, coating

films (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car

wash) etc., on the windscreen may cause the

rain and light sensor to be less sensitive, react

more slowly, later or not at all.

●

Crack on the windscreen: the impact of a

stone will trigger a single wipe cycle if the

rain and light sensor is activated. Subse-

quently, the sensor detects the reduction in

the reference surface area and adapts ac-

cordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will

vary with the size of the damage.

Clean the reference surface area of the rain

and light sensor

regularly and check that

the windscr

een wiper bl

ades hav

e not been

damaged.

CAUTION

The rain and light sensor does not always

detect rainf

all with sufficient accuracy so

does not always switch on the windscreen

wiper at the right moment.

●

If necessary, switch on the windscreen

wipers manually when water on the wind-

screen obstructs visibility.

Note

We recommend the use of a glass cleaning

product containing al

cohol to remove

traces of wax or polish.

Mirror

Int

erior r

ear vision mirr

Fig. 117 Manual anti-dazzle function for rear

vision mirr

110

Lights and visibility

The driver should always adjust the rear vi-

sion mirr

or t

o permit adequat

e visibility

through the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior

rear vision mirror

●

Basic position: point the lever at the bottom

of the mirror forwards.

●

Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-

dazzle function

›››

Fig. 117.

Exterior mirrors

Fig. 118 On the front doors: button to adjust

the mechanical e

erior r

ear vision mirror

Fig. 119 On the driver door: rotating control for

electric windows.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 15

Adjust the exterior mirrors by pressing the ad-

just button

›››

Fig. 118 or the rotary control*

›››

Fig. 119.

Folding in the exterior mirrors and returning

them to their original position is possible

through a mechanical system. Carefully fold

the exterior rear vision mirror casing towards

the side window or pull it away from the win-

dow until it clicks into place.

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking

care to av

oid injuries.

●

Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror

when there is no-one in the way of the mir-

ror.

●

When moving the mirror

, take care not to

trap fingers between the mirror and the

mirror bracket.

WARNING

Failure to correctly estimate the distance

of the v

ehicle behind coul

d lead to serious

accident.

●

Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors in-

crease the field of vision, however objects

appear smaller and further away in the mir-

rors.

●

The use of these mirrors to estimate the

distance to the next vehicle when changing

lane is imprecise and could result in serious

accident.

●

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to

estimate distances to vehicles behind you

or in other circumstances.

●

Make sure that the rear visibility is ade-

quate.

For the sake of the environment

The exterior mirror heating should be

switched off when it is no l

onger needed.

Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note

In the event of a fault, the electric exterior

mirrors can be adjusted manually by pr

ess-

ing the edge of the mirror surface.

111

Operation

Seats and head restraints

Adjusting the seat and head

estr

aints

Manual fr

ont seat adjustment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 14

WARNING

The safe driving chapter contains impor-

tant information, tips, suggestions and

arnings that you should read and observe

for your own safety and the safety of your

passengers

›››

page 49.

WARNING

●

Adjust the front seats only when the vehi-

e is stationary. Failure to follow this in-

struction could result in an accident.

●

Be careful when adjusting the seat

height. Careless or uncontrolled adjust-

ment can cause injuries.

●

The front seat backrests must not be re-

clined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and

the airbag system might not protect as

they should in case of an accident, increas-

ing risk of injury.

Removing and fitting the rear head

estr

aints

Fig. 120

Removing the rear head restraint

The rear seats are equipped with a head re-

str

aint.

emo

ving the rear head restraint.

●

Unlock the seat backrest and fold it forward

›››

page 122.

●

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go

›››

●

Pull the head restraint out of the fitting with-

out r

easing the butt

›››

Fig. 120

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat backward

again until it is engaged.

●

Safely store the removed head restraints.

Fitting the r

ear head r

estr

aint

●

Unlock the seat backrest and fold it forward

›››

page 122.

●

Insert the head restraint into the guides on

the seat backrest.

●

Push the head restraint down as far as it will

go while pressing button

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat backward

again until it is engaged.

●

Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-

sition

›

page 52.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed

or improperly adjusted incr

eases the risk of

severe or fatal injuries in the event of acci-

dents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

●

Always fit and adjust the head restraint

properly whenever a person is occupying a

seat.

●

Refit any removed head restraints imme-

diately so that passengers are properly

protected.

CAUTION

When removing and fitting the head re-

straint, make sur

e it does not hit the head-

liner of the vehicle or the front seat back-

rest. Otherwise, the interior roof and other

parts of the vehicle could be damaged.

112

Seats and head restraints

Seat functions

Seat heating*

Fig. 121

In the centre console: Front seats

heating s

wit

With the engine on, the seat cushion and the

seat backr

est can be heat

ed el

ectrically.

●

Enable: Press the  or  button at the top of

the centre console. Seat heating operates at

full power. All the control lamps light up.

●

Adjust: press the  or  button repeatedly

to adjust it to the required level.

●

Disable: press the  or  button as many

times as necessary until no control lamp re-

mains on.

When heat seating is at maximum level, after

approximately 15 minutes it goes back to the

first level automatically.

Cases in which the heat seating should

not be switched on

Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the

following conditions are met:

●

The seat is not occupied.

●

The seat has a cover.

●

A child seat has been installed on the seat.

●

The seat cushion is wet or damp.

●

The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-

er than +25°C (77°F).

WARNING

People whose pain or temperature thresh-

old has been affect

ed by some kind of

medicine, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g.

diabetes) could sustain burns to the back,

buttocks or legs. These burns could take a

long time to heal or never fully heal. Seek

medical advice if you have any doubts re-

garding your health.

●

People with a limited pain or temperature

threshold should never use the seat heat-

ing.

WARNING

If the upholstery gets soaked, the heat

seating could stop w

orking properly and

the risk of burns could increase.

●

Before using the seat heater, make sure

that the seat cushion is dry.

●

Do not sit on the seat if your clothes are

damp or w

et.

●

Do not leave wet or damp objects or

clothing on the seat.

●

Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION

●

o avoid damaging the heating el

ements,

refrain from kneeling on the seat or apply-

ing sharp pressure at a single point to the

seat cushion or backrest.

●

If liquids are spilled on the seats, sharp

objects are left on them or insulating mate-

rials are fitted (such as a cover or a child

seat) on them, the heating could get dam-

aged.

●

If you notice any odour, switch off the

seat heating immediately and have the unit

inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment

The seat heating should be switched off

when it is no longer needed. Otherwise, it is

an unnecessary fuel w

aste.

113

Operation

Transport and practical

equipment

anspor

ting objects

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage

compartment and place the seat backs in a

vertical position. Ne

ver overload the vehicle.

Both the carrying capacity as well as the dis-

tribution of the load in the vehicle affect driv-

ing behaviour and braking ability

›››

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

can cause serious injury in case of a sud-

den manoeuvring or breaking or in case of

an accident. This is especially true when

objects ar

e struck by a detonating airbag

and fired through the vehicle interior. To re-

duce the risks, please note the following:

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always

keep equipment and heavy objects in the

luggage compartment.

●

Always secure objects with suitable rope

or slings so that they cannot enter the de-

ployment areas around the frontal or side

airbags in case of sudden braking or an ac-

cident.

●

Always ensur

e that objects inside the ve-

hicle cannot move into the deployment

area of the bags while driving.

●

While driving, always keep object com-

partments closed.

●

Remove all objects from the front pas-

senger seat when it is folded down. When

the seat backrest is folded down, it presses

on small and light objects and these are

detected by the weight sensor on the seat;

this sends false information to the airbag

control unit.

●

While the backrest of the front passenger

seat is folded, the frontal airbag must re-

main disconnected and the PASSENGER

AIRBAG OFF  light on.

●

Objects secured in the vehicle should

never be placed in such a way as to make

passengers sit in an incorrect position.

●

If secured objects occupy a seat, this

seat should not be occupied or used by

anyone.

WARNING

The driving behaviour and braking ability

change when transporting heavy and l

arge

objects.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

●

Accelerate gently and carefully.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Brake early.

Transporting the load

Secure all objects in the vehicle

●

Distribute the load throughout the vehicle

and on the roof as uniformly as possibl

●

Transport heavy objects as far forward as

possible in the luggage compartment and

lock the seat backs in the vertical position.

●

Check the headlight adjustment

›››

page 103.

●

Use the suitable tyre pressure according to

the load being transported. Read the tyre in-

flation information label

›››

page 206.

CAUTION

Objects on the shelf could chafe against

the wires of the heating element in the

heat

ed rear window and cause damage.

Note

Please refer to the notes on loading the

roof carrier

››

›

page 127.

Driving with the rear lid open

Driving with the rear lid open creates an addi-

tional risk

. Secur

e all ob

jects and secure the

rear lid correctly and take all measures pos-

sible to reduce toxic gases from entering the

vehicle.

114

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open

could cause serious injuries.

●

Alw

ays drive with the rear lid closed.

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose

items could fall out of the vehicle and injure

other road users or damage other vehicles.

●

Drive particularly carefully and think

ahead.

●

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking

given that this could cause an uncontrolled

movement of the open rear lid.

●

When transporting objects that protrude

out of the luggage compartment, indicate

them suitably. Observe legal requirements.

●

If objects must project out of the luggage

compartment, the rear lid must never be

used to “secure” or “attach” objects.

●

If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid,

it should be removed before travelling with

the rear lid open.

WARNING

Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior

when the rear lid is open. This could cause

oss of consciousness, carbon monoxide

poisoning, serious injury and accidents.

●

To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle

always drive with the rear lid closed.

●

In exceptional circumstances, if you must

drive with the rear lid open, observe the fol-

lowing to reduce the entry of toxic gases in-

side the vehicle:

–

ose all windows.

–

Disable air recirculation mode.

–

Open all of the air outlets on the instru-

ment panel.

–

Switch on the blower to maximum.

CAUTION

An open boot hatch changes the length

and height of the v

ehicle

Driving a loaded vehicle

For the best handling when driving a loaded

ehicl

, note the following:

●

Secure all objects

›››

page 114.

●

Accelerate gently and carefully.

●

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

●

Brake early.

●

If necessary, read the instructions for driv-

ing with a roof carrier system

›››

page 127.

WARNING

A sliding load could considerably affect the

stability and saf

ety of the vehicle resulting

in an accident with serious consequences.

●

Secure loads corr

ectly so they do not

move.

●

When transporting heavy objects, use

suitable ropes or straps.

●

Lock the seat backs in vertical position.

Practical equipment

Introduction

Storage compartments must only be used to

e light or small ob

jects.

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements

or turns, loose ob

jects may be thrown

around the vehicle interior. This could

cause serious injuries to passengers and

cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-

cle.

●

Do not carry animals or store hard, heavy

or sharp objects in the vehicle in: open stor-

age compartments, instrument panel,

items of clothing or bags.

●

While driving, always keep object com-

partments closed.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell

could pre

vent use of the pedals. This could

115

Operation

lead the driver to lose control of the vehi-

cle, incr

easing the risk of a serious acci-

dent.

●

Make sure the pedals can be used at all

times, with no objects rolling underneath

them.

●

The floor mat should always be secured

to the floor.

●

Never place other mats or rugs on top of

the original mat supplied by the factory.

●

Make sure that no objects can fall into

the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in

motion.

CAUTION

●

Objects on the shelf could chaf

e against

the wires of the heating element in the

heated rear window and cause damage.

●

Do not keep temperature-sensitive ob-

jects, food or medicines inside the vehicle.

Heat and cold could damage them or ren-

der them useless.

●

Light-transparent objects placed inside

the vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying

glasses or transparent suction caps on the

windows, may concentrate the sun's rays

and cause damage to the vehicle.

Note

The ventilating slits between the heated

rear window and the r

ear shelf must not be

covered so that used air can escape from

the vehicle

Storage compartment on the driver

side

Fig. 122

On the driver side: storage compart-

ment.

There may be a storage compartment on the

driv

er side

Compar

tment on the centre con-

sole

Fig. 123

In the front part of the centre console:

age compartment.

The storage compartment

›

Fig. 123 may be

used as a drink holder

›››

page 119 or as an

ashtray*

›››

page 119 or to store small ob-

jects.

Note

A 12 volt electrical socket

›››

page 120 can

be found in the storage compartment.

116

Transport and practical equipment

Storage compartment with cover

on the passenger side*

Fig. 124 Storage compartment with cover on

the passenger side

There may be a storage compartment with

er on the passenger side

Opening and closing the storage com-

partment cover

Pull the lever to open

›››

Fig. 124

ose, press the cover upwards until it

clicks into place.

Sunglasses storage compartment.

Sunglasses can be stored in the passenger

side storage compartment.

The sunglasses storage compartment is in

the upper area of the storage compartment

Suppor

xt t

o the eyeglass storage compartment is

a notebook holder

and in the interior of the

age compartment ther

e is a pen holder

, a map storage area and a coin tray

CAUTION

For structural reasons, some model ver-

sions will have gaps behind the glo

ve com-

partment into which small objects may fall.

This could lead to strange noises and dam-

age to the vehicle. Therefore, do not store

small objects in the glove compartment,

apart from those stored in the spaces pro-

vided.

Bag support*

Fig. 125

Storage on front passenger side: fold-

ing hook

On the opening lever of the glove compart-

ment on the passenger side ther

e is a f

ding

hook

›››

Fig. 125 for hanging small items of

luggage, e.g. bags, etc.

CAUTION

●

The maximum weight for the hook is 1.5

●

With the hook folded forward, it automat-

ically draws up when the compartment is

opened.

●

We recommend removing hanging bags

from the hook before opening the glove

compartment.

117

Operation

Storage compartment in the back

of the centr

e consol

Fig. 126

In the rear part of the centre console:

age compartment.

The drink holder at the back of the centre

consol

e can be used as a st

age compart-

ment.

Other storage compartments

Fig. 127

The centre pillars contain garment

hooks.

Coat hooks

The centr

e pill

ars cont

ain garment hooks

›››

Fig. 127 (arrow).

Other storage compartments:

●

In the front door trims

›››

page 86.

●

Rear shelf for light items of clothing*.

●

Bag hook in the luggage compartment

›››

page 122.

●

In the upper part of the centre console, in-

stead of the radio

›››

Fig. 95

WARNING

Clothing hung on the coat hooks could re-

strict the driver's vie

w and lead to serious

accidents.

●

Hang the clothes from the hooks so that

driv

er's view is not restricted.

●

The coat hook is suitable for light items of

clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp

objects in the bags.

Drink holders

The drink holders are in the open storage

compartments in the driver and passenger

doors.

WARNING

Improper use of the drink holders can

cause injury.

●

Do not place containers with hot drinks in

a drink holder. During sudden br

aking or

driving manoeuvres, the hot drink could be

spilled and lead to scalding.

●

Ensure that no bottles or other object are

dropped in the driver footwell, as they

could get under the pedals and obstruct

their working.

●

Never place heavy containers, food or

other heavy objects in the drink holder. In

the event of an accident, these heavy ob-

jects could be “thrown around” the vehicle

interior and cause serious injuries.

118

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

Closed bottles inside the vehicle could ex-

plode or crack due t

o the heat or the cold.

●

Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle

if the inside temperature is too high or too

low.

CAUTION

Do not leave open drinks containers in the

drink holders when the vehicl

e is in motion.

They could spill during braking, for exam-

ple, and cause damage to the vehicle and

the electrical system.

Centre console drink holders

Fig. 128 In the front part of the centre console:

drink hol

der

Fig. 129 In the rear part of the centre console:

There are drink holders in the front and rear

parts of the centr

e consol

Securing the drink container in the front

drink holder

Fold the drink holder

›››

Fig. 128 forward.

Place the drink container in the drink holder

so that it is securely surrounded.

Ashtray*

Fig. 130

In the front part of the centre console:

open the ashtr

ay.

Opening and closing the ashtray

open

, lift the lid of the ashtray in the direc-

tion of the arrow

›››

Fig. 130.

To close, push the ashtray lid down.

Emptying the ashtray

●

Remove the ashtray from the storage com-

partment lifting it up.

●

After emptying the ashtray, insert it into the

drink holder from above.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the ashtray may cause a

fire or burns and other serious injuries.

●

Nev

er put paper or other flammable ob-

jects in the ashtray.

119

Operation

Cigarette lighter*

Fig. 131

In the front part of the centre console:

light

●

Push the button on the cigarette lighter in-

d with the ignition on

›

››

Fig. 131.

●

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

●

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the

cigarette on the glowing coil

›››

●

Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may

cause a fire or burns and other serious inju-

ries.

●

The cigarett

e lighter must only be used to

light cigarettes or similar.

●

Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used

when the ignition is switched on.

Note

The cigarette lighter can also be used with

the 12 Volt socket.

Power outlet and USB socket*

Fig. 132 Front centre console: 12-volt power

outl

et on the st

age compartment and USB in-

terface.

Electrical equipment can be connected to

the sock

et in the v

ehicl

All connected appliances should be in per-

fect working order without any faults.

Maximum power consumption

Power

socket

Maximum pow

er consump-

tion

12 Volts 120 Watts

The maximum capacity of the socket must

not be e

ceeded. The po

wer consumption is

indicated on the rating plate of each appli-

ance.

Where 2 or more appliances are connected

at the same time, the total rating of all the

connected devices must never exceed 190

Watts

›››

12 v

olt po

er socket

The 12 volt socket is found in the storage

compartment at the front of the centre con-

sole

›››

Fig. 132

and only functions when

the ignition is s

wit

ched on.

Using el

ectrical appliances with the engine

stopped and the ignition switched on will

drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devi-

ces connected to the power socket can only

be used when the engine is running.

To prevent voltage variations from causing

damage, switch off the electrical device con-

nected to the 12 Volt power socket before

switching the ignition on or off and before

starting the engine.

USB Interface

The factory-fitted USB interface is in the stor-

age compartment of the front part of the

centre console

120

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING

Improper use of the socket or electrical de-

vices could lead t

o a fire and cause serious

injuries.

●

Never leave children unsupervised in the

vehicle. The socket and equipment con-

nected to it can be used when the ignition is

switched on.

●

Should a connected electrical device

overheat, switch it off and unplug it imme-

diately.

CAUTION

●

Always f

ollow the operating instructions

for the appliances to be connected!

●

Never exceed the maximum power rating

as this could damage the vehicle's general

electrical system.

●

12 volt power socket:

–

Only use accessories with approved

electromagnetic compatibility accord-

ing to current regulations.

–

Never power the socket.

CAUTION

●

To avoid damage t

o the vehicle's electri-

cal system, never connect equipment that

generates electrical current, such as solar

panels or battery chargers, to the 12 volt

power sockets in order to charge the vehi-

cle's battery.

●

Only use accessories with approv

electromagnetic compatibility according

to current regulations.

●

To avoid damage due to voltage varia-

tions, switch off all devices connected to

the 12 V socket before switching the ignition

on or off and before starting the engine.

●

Never connect an appliance to the 12 volt

power socket that consumes more than the

power indicated in watts. Exceeding the

maximum power absorption could damage

the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment

Do not leave the engine running when the

vehicle is at a st

andstill.

Note

●

Using devices with the engine stopped

and the ignition s

witched on will drain the

battery.

●

Unshielded equipment can cause inter-

ference on the radio equipment and the ve-

hicle's electrical system.

●

Interference can occur on the radio's AM

waveband if electrical appliances are used

near the aerial.

Portable smartphone holder

Fig. 133

Assembling the universal support and

the hol

ding arm.

Fig. 134

On the centre console: close the

compartment wher

e the inf

ainment system is

housed.

Removing the smartphone

●

Grip the smartphone firmly with one hand.

121

Operation

●

ess the r

ease button

›››

Fig. 134

until

the t

op arm of the univ

ersal hol

der disengag-

es.

●

Remove the smart phone and, as the case

may be, unplug any cables.

Inserting a smart phone

●

If necessary, install the smartphone hous-

ing

›››

●

Connect the smartphone.

●

Place the smartphone on the bottom

mountings. T

o adjust the bott

om mountings,

ess button

›››

Fig. 134

●

Press the top arm of the universal holder

until the smartphone is secur

ely hel

d in pl

ace.

Disassembling the housing

●

If necessary, remove the smartphone.

●

Grip the universal holder

›››

Fig. 133

and

ess the r

ease button

›››

Fig. 133

●

Push the universal holder to the right (anti-

ockwise) and r

emo

ve it.

●

Grip the holder arm and

›››

Fig. 134

and

ess the r

ease button

›››

Fig. 134

in the

dir

ection of the arr

●

Remove the holder from the dash panel up-

wards.

Install the housing

●

Insert the universal holder

›››

Fig. 133

in-

o the sl

ots

on the holder

●

Move the universal holder to the side in the

ocking dir

ection

until it engages audi-

bly

›

●

Place the holder arm

›

Fig. 134

in the

anchoring pl

›

››

Fig. 134

from above

and pr

ess do

wn on it until you hear it en-

gage

›

››

WARNING

If a smartphone is not secured or is incor-

rectly secured in the v

ehicle, it could be

flung though the interior during a sudden

driving or braking manoeuvre or in the

event of an accident, and could cause inju-

ries.

●

The infotainment system holder must be

properly secured in the corresponding gap

in the dash panel.

●

The infotainment system must always be

properly secured in its holder or stored

safely in the vehicle.

CAUTION

If tilt and angle of visibility are not properly

adjusted the smart phone coul

d be dam-

aged.

●

When adjusting the smartphone, move it

with care and never beyond its limits.

CAUTION

At very high or very low temperatures the

smartphone might not operat

e properly, or

the actual device could get damaged.

●

Take your smart phone with you when

you get out of the vehicle to protect it from

very high or very low temperatures, and

from intense solar radiation.

CAUTION

Humidity can damage the electrical con-

tacts for the smar

tphone on the instrument

panel.

●

Do not wet the smartphone’s housing

when cleaning it. Use only a dry cloth.

Note

SEAT recommends that you always take

your smart phone with you when you get

out of the vehicl

e to avoid possible thefts.

Luggage compartment

Intr

oduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage

compartment and pl

ace the seat backs in a

ertical position. Ne

ver overload the vehicle.

Both the carrying capacity as well as the dis-

tribution of the load in the vehicle have

122

Transport and practical equipment

effects on the driving behaviour and braking

abilit

›

WARNING

When the vehicle is not in use or being

watched, al

ways lock the doors and the

rear lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or

death.

●

Do not leave children unwatched, espe-

cially when the boot is open. Children

could climb into the luggage compartment,

close the rear lid from inside and be unable

to escape themselves. This could lead to

serious injury or death.

●

Never allow children to play in or around

the vehicle.

●

Never transport people in the luggage

compartment.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

can cause serious injury in case of a sud-

den manoeuvring or breaking or in case of

an accident. This is especially true when

objects ar

e struck by a detonating airbag

and fired through the vehicle interior. To re-

duce the risks, please note the following:

●

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always

place equipment and heavy objects in the

boot.

●

Always secure objects to the fastening

rings with suitable rope or straps to prevent

them from being thrown around the interior

and moving to the airbag deployment area

in the event of sudden mo

vements or acci-

dents.

●

While driving, always keep object com-

partments closed.

●

Do not place hard, heavy or sharp ob-

jects inside the vehicle interior, in open

storage compartments, the rear shelf of

the boot or on the dash panel.

●

Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects

from clothes and pockets inside the vehicle

and store securely.

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes ve-

hicle handling and increases br

aking dis-

tance. Heavy loads that have not been

stored or secured correctly could cause

loss of control and result in serious injury.

●

Vehicle handling changes when trans-

porting heavy objects due to a change in

the centre of gravity.

●

Distribute the load as uniformly and as

low down on the vehicle as possible.

●

Store heavy objects in the luggage com-

partment as far from the rear axle as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe

against the wires of the heating element in

the heated rear window and cause dam-

age.

Note

The ventilating slits between the heated

ear window and the r

ear shelf must not be

covered so that used air can escape from

the vehicle.

Folding and lifting up the rear seat

bench backr

est

Fig. 135

Back seat: unlock button

; red

marking

The rear seat backrest can be folded forward

o e

end the luggage compartment.

123

Operation

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards

●

Push the head restraint down as far as it will

go or r

emo

e it if necessary

›››

page 49 and

store it in a safe place.

●

Pull the unlock switch

›››

Fig. 135

for-

ds whil

st simultaneously lifting the rear

seat backrest.

●

The rear seat backrest is not engaged

when the red marking of the button

is visi-

●

If the r

ear seat backrest is folded, people

(including children) are not permitted to trav-

el in the rear folded seats.

Folding up the rear seat backrest

●

Lift back the backrest of the rear seat and

push it firmly into the lock until it clicks se-

curely into place

›››

●

The red marking on the unlock button

must not be seen.

●

Make sure that the backrest of the rear seat

is secur

ely l

ock

ed in position so that the seat

belts can provide proper protection in the

rear seats.

●

If necessary, reinstall and readjust the head

restraints

›››

page 112.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the backrests of the rear

seats carelessly without paying att

ention

could cause serious injury.

●

Never f

old or lift the seats while driving.

●

Do no trap or damage seat belts when

raising the seat backrest.

●

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs

away from the range of the rear seat

backrests when folding and lifting them.

●

All seat backrests must engage correctly

for the seat belts on the rear seats to work

properly. When the backrest of an occu-

pied seat is not correctly locked in place,

the passenger can be thrust forward with

the rear seat backrest in case of sudden

braking, sudden manoeuvres or an acci-

dent.

●

A red signal on the button

warns that

the backrest is not engaged. Alw

ays check

to make sure that the red mark is not visible

when the backrest of the rear seat is in the

upright position.

●

No seat must be occupied if the backrest

of the rear seat is folded or not correctly

engaged.

CAUTION

Before folding the rear seat backrest, ad-

just the front seats so that neither the head

restr

aint or backrest hit them when folded.

If necessary, remove the head restraints

›››

page 112 and store them safely.

Luggage compartment shelf*

Fig. 136

In the boot: removing and installing

the r

ear shelf

You may put light items of clothing on the rear

shelf

. Check that the r

ear vie

w is not limited.

Removing the shelf

●

Unhook the loops

›››

Fig. 136

from hous-

ings

●

Extract the shelf from its housing

up-

ds and then pull it out.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects

or animals on the rear shelf coul

d cause

serious injuries in case of a sudden ma-

noeuvre, sudden braking or an accident.

●

Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp ob-

jects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.

●

Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

124

Transport and practical equipment

●

Never driv

e with the rear shelf raised. Al-

ways lower it or remove it before the jour-

ney.

CAUTION

To prevent the rear shelf from being dam-

aged:

●

Always check that the side supports are

firmly engaged.

●

Regulate the height of the load in the lug-

gage compar

tment to ensur

e the rear shelf

does not press down on the load with the

rear lid closed.

Luggage compartment variable

oor

Fig. 137 A: open the boot variable floor. B:

aised boot v

ariabl

e floor.

Fig. 138 C: extend the boot downward. D: ex-

end the boot f

orw

ard.

Raise and lower the boot floor

●

To r

aise the floor, raise handle

›

Fig. 137

in the direction of the arrow and pull from the

oor all the w

ay up

›

››

Fig. 137 B.

●

To lower it, guide the floor downward.

Extend the boot downward

●

Raise the boot floor and push it downward

in the rail

›››

Fig. 138 C (arrows)

●

Place the variable floor over the floor lining.

●

If necessary, fold the backrest of the rear

seat forward

›››

page 123.

125

Operation

Extending the luggage compartment for-

●

Disassembl

e the luggage compartment

tray

›››

page 124.

●

Disassemble the rear headrests

›››

page 49.

●

Fold the backrest of the rear seat forward

›››

page 123.

●

If necessary, expand the boot downward.

CAUTION

Do not let the luggage compartment floor

fall when closing it. Al

ways carefully guide

it downward in a controlled manner. Other-

wise, the lining and the floor of the boot

could be damaged.

Class N1 (commercial) vehicles

For safe vehicle operation, the electrical sys-

em must w

ork perf

ectly. Special attention

should be paid so it is not damaged during

adjustment, loading and unloading of trans-

ported objects.

Fastening rings*

In the front part of the luggage compartment,

ther

e may be f

ast

ening rings to secure the

luggage.

In order to use the fastening rings, they must

be lifted beforehand.

WARNING

If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining

straps are used, they may br

eak in the

event of braking or an accident. Objects

could then be launched across the passen-

ger compartment and cause serious or fa-

tal injuries.

●

It is important to always use belts or re-

taining straps that are suitable and in a

good condition.

●

Belts and retaining straps should be se-

curely fastened to the fastening rings.

●

Objects in the luggage compartment

that are unsecured could move suddenly

and modify the handling of the vehicle.

●

Small light objects should also be fixed in

place.

●

A child seat should never be secured with

the fastening rings.

Note

●

The maximum tensile l

oad that the fas-

tening rings can support is 3.5 kN.

●

Belts and securing systems for the ap-

propriate load can be obtained from speci-

alised dealerships. SEAT recommends visit-

ing a SEAT dealership for this.

Retaining hooks

Fig. 139

In the boot: retaining hooks.

There may be hooks in the upper left and

right part of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Never use these hooks to secure objects. In

case of sudden braking or an accident,

they could rupt

ure.

CAUTION

The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg

each.

126

Transport and practical equipment

Roof carrier

Intr

oduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-

mise aerodynamics. For this r

eason, conven-

tional roof carrier systems cannot be secured

to the water drains.

Given that the water drains have been incor-

porated into the roof for aerodynamic rea-

sons, only the SEAT approved basic supports

and roof carrier systems can be used.

When the roof carrier system should be re-

moved:

●

When they are not used.

●

When the vehicle is being washed in a car

wash.

●

When the vehicl

e height exceeds the maxi-

mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING

The risk of an accident is increased by

transporting heavy or bulk

y loads on the

roof, which affects the car's handling by

shifting the centre of gravity and increasing

susceptibility to cross winds.

●

Always secure loads correctly with suita-

ble and undamaged attachment rope or

straps.

●

Large

, heavy, wide and flat loads nega-

tively affect the vehicle aerodynamics,

centre of gravity and handling.

●

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden

braking.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

CAUTION

●

ways r

emove the roof carrier system

from the roof before entering a car wash.

●

The height of your vehicle is changed by

the installation of the roof carrier and the

load secured on it. Compare the vehicle

height with the passage height, for exam-

ple in underground car parks or for garage

doors.

●

The roof antenna and the range of the

rear lid should not be affected by the roof

carrier system or the load being transpor-

ted.

●

Take extra care not to let the hatch strike

the roof load when opening.

For the sake of the environment

The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof

carrier system is fitted.

Fastening the base supports and

the r

oof carrier syst

Fig. 140

Attachment points for the basic sup-

ports and the r

oof carrier syst

em in f

our-door

vehicles.

The mounts are the basis of a complete roof

carrier syst

em. Special fixt

es must be add-

ed in order to safely transport luggage, bicy-

cles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof.

The suitable accessories can be acquired at

SEAT dealerships.

Securing the base supports and roof carri-

er system

The roof carrier system must always be in-

stalled exactly according to the instructions

provided.

The holes or marks indicating the fitting

points for base supports are in the lower half

of the roof struts and can only be seen with

the door open

›››

Fig. 140.

127

Operation

The base support should only be fitt

ed t

o the

points indicat

ed in the diagram.

WARNING

If the base supports and the roof carrier

system are incorr

ectly fitted or used in an

unsuitable manner, the entire system could

break free causing accident and injury.

●

Always take the manufacturer assembly

instructions into account.

●

Only use base supports and roof carrier

systems that are not damaged and are cor-

rectly fitted.

●

The base support should only be fitted to

the points indicated in the diagram

›››

Fig. 140.

●

Secure the base supports and roof carri-

er system correctly.

●

Check the screws and attachments be-

fore driving and after a short distance. Dur-

ing each long journey, check the attach-

ments during every break.

●

Always fit the roof carrier system correct-

ly for wheels, skis and surfboards, etc.

●

Never modify or repair the basic supports

or roof carrier system.

Note

Read and take into account the instructions

included with the roof carrier system fitt

and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier

Loads can only be correctly secured when

the roof carrier system is corr

ectly fitted

›››

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum authorised r

oof load is 50 kg.

The roof load includes the weight of the base

support, the roof carrier system and the load

being transported

›››

Always check the w

eight of the base support,

the roof carrier system and the weight of the

load to be transported and, if necessary,

weigh them. Never exceed the maximum au-

thorised roof load.

If you are using a roof carrier with a lower

weight rating, you cannot transport the maxi-

mum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum

weight limit for the roof carrier given in the fit-

ting instructions.

Distributing a load

Uniformly distribute loads and secure them

correctly

›››

Check att

achments

Aft

er fitting the base supports and the r

oof

carrier system, always check the attach-

ments after a short trip and at regular inter-

vals.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof

load can result in accidents and/or v

ehicle

damage.

●

Never surpass the maximum authorised

weight for the roof, the maximum author-

ised weight on the axles and the total maxi-

mum authorised weight of the vehicle.

●

Never exceed the capacity of the roof

carrier system even if this is less than the

maximum authorised roof load.

●

Secure heavy items as far forward as

possible and distribute the vehicle load

uniformly.

WARNING

Loose and incorrectly secured loads can

fall from the r

oof carrier system causing

accidents and injury.

●

Always use suitable ropes and straps in

good condition.

●

Always secure loads correctly.

128

Air conditioning

Heating, v

entil

ation and air

conditioning

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 29

One of the following systems can be installed

in the vehicle:

●

Heating and fresh air system

●

Manual air conditioning

●

Climatronic

The heating and fresh air system

heats and

ventilates the interior. The heating and fresh

air system cannot cool.

The manual air conditioning and the Cli-

matronic cool and dehumidify the air. They

operate most effectively with the windows

and the sunroof closed. If a great deal of heat

accumulates in the interior, ventilating it can

accelerate the cooling process.

Display of active functions

The LEDs that light up on the rotary controls

on the buttons indicate that the function in

question is activated.

In the case of the Climatronic, the control

panel screen shows the functions that are

currently activated.

WARNING

When visibility through the window display

is poor, the risk of collisions and accidents

which may cause serious injury increases.

●

o guarantee good visibility, keep all win-

dows free of ice and snow and properly

demisted.

●

Adjust the heating, air conditioning and

the heated rear window so that the win-

dows do not mist up.

●

Drive off only when you have good visibil-

ity through the windows.

●

Do not use the air recirculation for long

periods of time. When the cooling is switch-

ed off and the air recirculation is on, the

windows can mist over very quickly and se-

riously impair visibility.

●

Switch the air recirculation off when you

do not need it.

WARNING

Used air can quickly cause driver tiredness

and reduce their attention span, which

coul

d lead to collisions, accidents and seri-

ous injury.

●

Never switch off the fan for a long time or

leave the air recirculation on for too long,

since no exterior air enters the interior dur-

ing that time.

CAUTION

If the air conditioning is not working, switch

it off immediat

ely, together with the de-

ost/demist function (in the case of man-

ual air conditioning) and have a special-

ised workshop check it out. This may help

to avoid other possible damage.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the heated rear win-

, ne

ver affix adhesives to the electric

filaments on the inside of it.

Air recirculation

In air recirculation mode, no fresh air enters

the v

ehicl

e int

erior.

To switch on the air recirculation, turn the ad-

juster to the right  or press the  button.

To switch off the air recirculation, turn the ad-

juster to the left  or press the  button

again

›››

WARNING

Used air can quickly cause driver tiredness

and reduce their attention span, which

129

Operation

could lead to collisions, accidents and seri-

ous injury.

●

Never use the air recirculation for too

long, since no ext

erior air enters the interior

during that time.

●

When the cooling is switched off and the

air recirculation is on, the windows can mist

over very quickly and seriously impair visi-

bility.

●

Switch the air recirculation off when you

do not need it.

CAUTION

In vehicles with an air conditioner, do not

smoke when air recir

culation is switched

on. The smoke taken in could impregnate

the cooling vaporiser and the activated

charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen

filter, leading to permanent unpleasant

odours.

Note

●

Climatronic: When r

everse gear is en-

gaged, the air recirculation switches on

briefly to prevent exhaust gas from enter-

ing the interior.

●

When the outside temperature is very

high, it is recommendable to switch the air

recirculation on briefly to cool down the in-

terior fast

er.

Air vents

Fig. 141 On the dash panel air vents.

130

Air conditioning

To achieve sufficient heating power, cooling

and v

entil

ation in the int

erior, the vents should

be left open.

Key to the Fig. 141:

Adjustable air vents: the vent slats can be

used to open and close the vents and to

adjust air direction. For the air to reach

the windows as best as possible, open the

corr

esponding v

ent and t

urn it to the de-

frost/demist position, where it will en-

gage.

Non-adjustable air vents

There are more vents in the footwell areas

and at the back of the interior.

CAUTION

Never place food, medicines or other tem-

peratur

e-sensitive objects close to the air

vents. Food, medicines and other objects

sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged

or made unsuitable for use by the air com-

ing from the vents.

Tips and instructions for use

Fig. 142 In the centre console, top section: Clima-

tronic control panel

The following tips and instructions for use will

help you t

o use the syst

ems pr

operly.

Reasons why the cooling switches off au-

tomatically or will not switch on

●

The engine is not running.

●

The fan is switched off.

●

The air conditioner fuse has blown.

●

The outside temperature is lower than

around +3°C (+38°F).

●

The cooling system compressor has been

temporarily switched off because the engine

coolant temperature is too high.

●

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air

conditioner checked by a specialised work-

shop.

How to optimise visibility

●

To improve heating or cooling performance

and to prevent the windows from misting over,

keep the air intake slots in front of the wind-

screen free of snow, ice and leaves.

●

To allow the air to move freely through the

interior from the front to the rear, keep the

ventilation slits located at the back of the lug-

gage compartment free.

131

Operation

●

The highest possibl

e heating po

er will on-

ly be reached and ice removed from the win-

dows as quickly as possible when the coolant

is at its operating temperature.

Recommended settings for the heating

and fresh air system and the manual air

conditioning

●

Switch off the air recirculation.

●

Set fan speed  or .

●

Turn the temperature control to the inter-

mediate position.

●

Open and direct all the air outlets in the

dash panel.

●

Turn the air distribution control to the re-

quired position.

●

Manual air conditioning: press the  but-

ton in the control panel to switch on the cool-

ing. The air is dehumidified in cooling mode.

Recommended Climatronic settings

●

Press the 

button in the control panel.

●

Set the temperature to +22°C (+72°F).

●

Open and direct the air outlets in the dash

panel.

Maximum cooling po

er or heating po

wer

in the case of Climatronic

When driving, the maximum cooling power or

heating power can be adjusted by pressing

the

›

Fig. 142 button repeatedly.

The temperature is not regulated.

●

Maximum cooling potency: set the temper-

ature below +16°C (+60°F). The display then

shows LO.

●

Maximum heating potency: set the temper-

ature above +29°C (+84°F). The display then

shows HI.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter should be changed

regularly in order to maintain air conditioner

performance.

If the vehicle is used frequently in areas

where the outside air is highly polluted, it may

be necessary to change the filter before the

next scheduled service.

Water under the vehicle

If the humidity and temperature outside the

vehicle are high, condensation can drip off

the evaporator in the cooling system and

form a small pool underneath the vehicle.

This is normal and does not indicate a leak!

132

Introduction

Infotainment System

Intr

oduction

Saf

y warnings

Safety warnings regarding the Info-

tainment system

WARNING

Distracting the driver in any way can lead

to an accident and cause injuries. Operat

ing the radio system while driving can dis-

tract your attention from the traffic.

●

Always drive as carefully and responsibly

as possible.

●

Select volume settings that allow you to

easily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens

and horns).

●

Hearing may be impaired if using too high

a volume setting, even if only for short peri-

ods of time.

WARNING

The volume level may suddenly change

when you switch audio sour

ce or connect a

new audio source.

●

Lower the base volume before connect-

ing or switching the audio source.

WARNING

Connecting, inserting or removing a data

medium while driving can distract your at

tention from the traffic and cause an acci-

dent.

WARNING

Connecting leads for external devices may

obstruct the driver.

●

Arr

ange the connecting leads so that

they do not obstruct the driver.

WARNING

External devices that are loose or not prop-

erly secured could mo

ve around the pas-

senger compartment during a sudden driv-

ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident

and cause damage or injury.

●

Never place external devices on the

doors, the windscreen, on or close to the

zone marked with the “AIRBAG” word of the

steering wheel, the instrument panel or the

backrests, or between these zones and the

passengers. External devices can cause

serious injury in an accident, especially

when the airbags inflate.

WARNING

Opening a CD player's housing can lead to

injuries from invisible l

aser radiation.

●

Have CD players r

epaired only by quali-

fied workshops.

CAUTION

The system can be damaged by the incor-

ect insertion of a dat

a storage device or

the insertion of an incompatible data stor-

age device.

●

When inserting and removing CDs, al-

ways hold them at right angles to the front

of the CD drive without tilting so as not to

scratch them.

●

If a CD or DVD is inserted while another is

already in the unit or being ejected, the

DVD drive may be irreparably damaged.

Always wait until the data medium is com-

pletely ejected.

CAUTION

Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage

device and non-round media may damage

the CD pl

ayer.

●

Only use clean, standard 12-cm CDs.

–

Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel off

and damage the drive.

–

Do not use printable data media. Prin-

ted labels and coverings may peel off

and damage the CD drive.

–

Do not insert 8-cm single CDs or irreg-

ularly shaped or non-round CDs.

133

Infotainment System

–

Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual

Discs or Flip Discs, as these ar

e thicker

than normal CDs.

CAUTION

The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-

aged if the v

olume is too high or the sound

is dist

orted.

134

Introduction

Overview of the unit

ou&Mii Music

Fig. 143

Overview of the controls

Arrow buttons (radio/media mode)

›

page 139,

›››

page 141

Slot for SD cards

›››

page 142

CD slot

Screen

AUX-IN multimedia socket

›››

page 144

Eject the CD

Sound settings

Volume. Off and on

›››

page 137,

›››

page 138

Radio mode (change of band frequency)

›››

page 139

Media mode (audio sources)

›

page 141

Function buttons

›››

page 137

Go back to the previous menu

Settings menu

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 137

135

Infotainment System

You&Mii Colour Connection

Fig. 144

Overview of the controls

Volume. Off and on

›

page 137,

›››

page 137

Slot for SD cards

›››

page 142

Screen

AUX-IN multimedia socket

›››

page 144

Settings button (search and selection)

›››

page 137

Radio mode (change of band frequency)

›››

page 139

Media mode (audio sources)

›››

page 141

Function buttons

›››

page 137

Telephone mode

›››

page 145

Selecting the main menu

›››

page 136

Main menus

●

To access the main menu, press button

 .

●

To select a function, rotate the setting But-

until it is highlighted and press the but-

on.

136

Introduction

General operating informa-

tion

Additional instructions

Depending on the vehicle, notifications of the

factory-fitt

ed driving assistance systems are

shown on the display. The notifications close

automatically when they are no longer use-

ful.

All notifications are only displayed after com-

pletely rebooting the radio system.

Note

●

Pushing the buttons gently is enough to

use the equipment.

●

Due t

o country-specific legislation, cer-

tain functions may not be available when

the vehicle is travelling above a certain

speed.

●

Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-

cle may provoke noise in the speakers.

●

On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-

ume of the active audio source is automati-

cally lowered when reverse gear is selec-

ted.

Thumbwheels, equipment and

function butt

ons

Overview

●

Rotary/push knobs.

●

Equipment buttons named (physical but-

tons).

●

Function butt

ons (virtual buttons).

Rotary/push knobs

The left-hand rotary knob  is known as vol-

ume control or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary knob is known as the

settings button.

Equipment buttons and function buttons

The named buttons of the equipment are

known as “equipment buttons” and are

shown with a button symbol inside a rectan-

gle, for instance, equipment button 

Unnamed equipment butt

ons ar

e l

ocated be-

low the screen. These equipment buttons are

known as “function buttons” as their purpose

depends on the active function mode.

The function assigned to a function button is

explained on the bottom of the display,

above the corresponding button.

Switching on and off

●

To manually switch the system on and off,

briefly press the rot

ary knob .

When the unit is switched on the system

starts up. The last active audio source will be

played with the volume set, as long this does

not exceed the maximum, predefined

“switch-on” volume ( Volume

Depending on the equipment and country,

when switching off the engine or r

emoving

the key from the ignition, the system switches

off automatically. If the system is switched on

again without switching on the ignition, it will

switch off automatically after approximately

30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Power management

If the charge of the battery goes below the

minimum onboard charge with the ignition

switched off and the system active, an audi-

ble warning will be emitted and the LOW BAT-

TERY message will be displayed. If this hap-

pens, you should turn off the equipment.

Anti-theft password

The anti-theft password of the system is stor-

ed in the system after entering it for the first

time (radio comfort password). If you have to

enter the anti-theft password manually, for

137

Infotainment System

instance, because the system has been in-

all

ed in a diff

erent vehicle, please go to a

SEAT authorised service.

If only the battery was disconnected, switch

on the ignition before turning the system on

again.

Change base volume

Function Operation

Turn volume

up.

Turn the volume control  clock-

wise.

Turn volume

down.

Turn the v

olume control  anti-

clockwise.

Changes in base volume are indicated by a

“v

olume bar” on the scr

een, which is dis-

ayed briefly.

It is possible to preset certain volume settings

and adjustments.

Mute system sound

●

Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise

until it displays



●

OR: press the volume switch briefly  to

mute or unmute the system.

While the sound of the system is muted

(MUTE), the playback Media source stops.

Note

If the base volume has been considerably

increased to pl

ay a certain audio source,

lower the volume again before switching to

another audio source.

138

Audio Mode

adio Mode

Intr

oduction

The radio system is supplied in different ver-

sions depending on the country and the fea-

tur

es of the vehicle. Some systems also have

a DAB radio receiver. The general dashboard

contains the possible versions of the system

›››

page 135.

Note

●

Bear in mind that being in underground

parking l

ots, in tunnels, in areas with tall

buildings or mountains can interfere with

radio signals.

●

Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to

the windows may affect reception on vehi-

cles with a window aerial.

RADIO main menu

Fig. 145 RADIO Main Menu: select frequency

band.

Fig. 146 RADIO main menu: Indication of pre-

set butt

ons.

●

Press 



 so start the Radio mode.

Aft

er s

wit

ching the Radio mode, the available

frequency bands (FM, AM

and DAB

) will be

shown on the bottom of the display. Press the



equipment button gain to display more

functions f

or the r

adio r

eceiver.

The following options are available:

●

Search next station.

●

Access a previously saved station.

●

Switching the TP function on and off

●

Save current station

›››

page 140.

The current station is shown in the middle of

the screen. If the station allows for RDS and

the connection is good, instead of the fre-

quency, the name of the station will be

shown, e.g. RADIO 21.

Change frequency band

The frequency band selected (FM, AM

) is sho

wn on the t

op left.

●

In Radio mode, press the 

equipment

butt

on briefly t

o displ

ay the FM

, AM

and

function butt

ons

›

Fig. 145.

●

Press one of the function buttons FM

, AM

or D

to change the frequency band.

●

OR: Pr

ess the 





equipment button a few

times t

o cycl

e thr

ough the different lower

function buttons.

This depends on the country and unit in ques-

tion.

139

Infotainment System

Changing station

Fig. 147 Go to the next available station with

the arrow butt

ons.

Fig. 148 Changing the stations with the arrow

butt

ons is only possibl

e f

or saved stations.

●

Press the  or  arrow button on the sys-

em or the displ

ay.

Based on the mode sel

ected for the search

engine (Button keys:) you can cycle

through either available or saved stations.

Manually tuning station frequency

●

To select the desired frequency band

›››

page 139.

●

Press the function button of the frequency

band .

●

Rotate the setting switch until the desired

frequency is shown on the display

(e.g. 89.9 MHz).

●

OR: Press one of the double-arrow buttons

›››

Fig. 150 until the frequency is shown on

the screen.

Saving stations in preset buttons

Fig. 149 Station on the FM frequency band

ed in pr

eset button 6.

Fig. 150 Additional radio functions.

Stations that are already saved are overwrit-

ten if another station is st

ored in the same

preset button.

Assigning different preset buttons manual-

●

Select the frequency band

›››

page 139.

●

Select station

›››

page 140.

●

Change to preset buttons. To do this, press

button 

›

Fig. 151

●

Press and hold the desired preset button

until an audible signal is heard.

●

The current station (RADIO 21) will be saved

in this preset button.

You can update the station list by pressing

and holding the 

equipment button or

using the  function butt

›

Fig. 150.

140

Audio Mode

Choosing stored stations

Fig. 151 Radio mode notification: change of

station using the arro

w buttons.

Fig. 152 Saved stations.

●

Select the frequency band on which the

ation is sav

ed.

●

ess the function button, 

●

Press the pr

eset butt

on in which the st

ation

is saved briefly.

Depending on the settings, you can cycle

through the stations of a frequency band with

the arrow buttons 

and  (Arrow but-

tons:).

The stored stations can only be played if they

can be r

eceiv

ed at the curr

ent location.

Media Mode

Introduction

“Media sources” ar

e audio sources contain-

ing audio files on various different data stor-

age devices (e.g. CD, external MP3 players).

These audio files can be played with their

corresponding applications or the radio's au-

dio inputs.

Note

●

Do not use memory card adapters.

●

SEAT assumes no liabilit

y for any deterio-

ration or loss of files on data storage devi-

ces.

Select a Media source

Fig. 153 Select a Media source

Press the 



equipment button to switch to

the Media mode

When s

wit

ching to the Media mode, the bot-

tom of the screen shows the available Media

sources for a few seconds. The Media source

that is currently playing is highlighted.

Open the Media selection menu manually

and select a Media source

●

In the Media mode, press the 

equip-

ment butt

on t

o displ

ay the Media selection

menu again.

●

Enable the Media source you want by

pressing the corresponding function button.

●

OR: Press the 

equipment button again

o cycl

e thr

ough the available Media sources.

141

Infotainment System

Function button: Media source



SD card in the slot for SD cards

›››

page 142.

*

Audio or MP3 CD in the internal CD play-

er.



USB data st

orage in the USB socket

›››

page 143. You can see the location of

the connection in

›››

page 120.

*

Smartphone paired through Bluetooth

›››

page 143



External audio source connected to the

AUX-IN multimedia socket

››

›

page 144.

When a Media source that has already been

ayed is sel

ect

ed again, playback is re-

sumed from the point at which it ended (ex-

cept for: AUX

›››

page 144).

SD card playback

Fig. 154 SD card playback: List of tracks.

●

Insert the SD car

d first with the cut corner

acing up and the titl

e on the left in the slot for

SD cards.

●

Press the button 

ayback continues with the l

ast Media

sour

ce selected. To play the SD card press .

In the folder view, browse with the  function

button and the settings button. Press  to

access a higher golder level and rotate the

settings switch to select the desired folder.

To switch to the previous or next track, press

either 

or  .

Hol

d one of the arr

w buttons to fast-forward

or rewind the track.

During playback, the following function but-

tons are available on the bottom of the

screen. Active function buttons are highligh-

ted.

Function button: Meaning



Playlist notification. Here you can also se-

lect a track dir

ectly with the settings but-

ton

›››

Fig. 154.



Previous track or rewind.



Play. It can also be pressed to stop the

ayback. In this case

, the symbol

changes to 



Next title or fast-forward

Function button: Meaning



Random play.



To repeat a folder or track. The  symbol

indicates that the current tr

ack is on re-

peat.

Valid for Media sources: SD card, USB socket and

Bluetooth audio

In the list of playlists (butt

on ) the following

options are available:

Function button: Meaning



To change the main folder of the SD card.



To access a higher folder level. In the folder

list, you can select a differ

ent audio source

with 

›››

page 141.



Play. It can also be pressed to stop the

playback.



andom play.



To repeat a folder or track. The  symbol

indicat

es that the current tr

ack is on re-

peat.

Ejecting the SD card

Connect

ed dat

a st

orage devices must be

prepared before their disconnection in order

to remove them without damaging it.

●

Press the Infotainment button MENU

and

then pr

ess

System settings.

Audio Mode

●

Sel

ect

Remove source safely and then

SD Card. Aft

er correctly ejecting the data

storage device from the system, the function

button becomes inactive (grey colour).

●

Now you can remove the SD card.

External data storage device in the

USB socket

Depending on the country and device, there

might be one or sever

al USB ports  in the

vehicle.

The location of the USB ports  depends on

the vehicle in question.

Audio files on an external data storage device

connected to the USB port  can be played

and controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external data

storage devices, this means USB mass stor-

age devices containing supported audio files,

such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only compatible audio files are displayed.

Other files are ignored.

The rest of operations to use the external da-

ta device storage (changing tracks, selecting

tracks and enabling playback modes) are

carried out similarly to other audio sources

(e.g. “Playback from SD card”

›››

page 142.

Instructions and restrictions

The number of USB ports  and their com-

patibility with Apple™ de

vices as well as with

other media players depends on the features.

The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt-

age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

Due to the large number of different data

storage devices and various iPod™ and

iPhone™ generations available, it is not possi-

ble to guarantee fault-free operation of all

functions described here.

Take into account all other instructions and

limitations regarding requirements for media

sources.

Disconnecting

Connected data storage devices must be

prepared before their disconnection in order

to remove them.

●

Press the Infotainment button 

and

then pr

ess Syst

em settings .

●

Select R

emove source safely and then

SD Car

. After correctly ejecting the data

age de

vice from the system, the function

button becomes inactive (grey colour).

●

Now the data storage device can be dis-

connected.

Playback over Bluetooth

Connection of a safe audio source through

Bluetooth

Audio mode all

ows you to listen to

audio files being played on a Bluetooth

au-

dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-

ted via Bluetooth

(audio playback by Blue-

tooth

) over the vehicle speakers.

Requirements

●

The Bluetooth® audio source must support

the A2DP Bluetooth

profil

●

In the Bluetooth Settings menu the

 BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function

must be on.

ting Bluet

ooth

audio transmission

●

Activate Bluetooth

visibility on the external

Bluetooth

audio source (e.g., mobile tele-

phone).

●

Lower the base volume on the Infotainment

system.

●

Press the button 

●

Press the  function butt

on t

o sel

ect Blue-

tooth

as a media source.

●

Start searching for the desired Bluetooth

device.

●

Please refer to the instructions on the

screen of the Infotainment system and on the

Bluetooth

audio source regarding the rest of

the procedure.

143

Infotainment System

You may still need to manually start playback

on the Bluet

ooth

sour

. When playback on

the Bluetooth

audio source is stopped, the

Infotainment system remains in Bluetooth

Audio mode.

Controlling playback

The extent to which the Bluetooth

audio

source can be controlled via the Infotainment

system depends on the connected Blue-

tooth

audio source.

With media players that support the AVRCP

Bluetooth

profile, playback on the Blue-

tooth

audio source can be automatically

started or stopped when the unit is switched

to Bluetooth

Audio mode or to a different au-

dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or

change the track via the Infotainment system.

WARNING

Do not perform the pairing and connection

process while driving. This may cause an

accident

Note

●

Due to the lar

ge number of possible Blue-

tooth

audio sources, it is not possible to

guarantee fault-free operation of all de-

scribed functions for all these sources.

●

To operate the media and phone with the

Bluetooth

device connected, please read

the electronic Instructions Manual of the

manufactur

er.

●

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices.

You can request information about compat-

ible Bluetooth

products at a SEAT Author-

ised Service or online.

External audio source connected to

the AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the version of the vehicle, there

is an AUX-IN connection on the fr

ont of the r

dio

›

››

page 135, in the glove compartment

on the passenger side, on the centre console

or on the armrest between the front seats.

The AUX-IN multimedia connection can only

be used with a 3.5 mm jack.

A connected external audio source is played

over the vehicle speakers and cannot be

controlled via the radio system controls.

The AUX-IN multimedia connection must be

activated in the system settings so it can be

displayed on the Media selection menu

›››

page 141.

Connecting an external audio source to

the AUX-IN multimedia socket

●

Lower the base volume on radio.

●

Connect the external audio source to the

AUX-IN multimedia socket.

●

Start playback on the external audio

source.

●

In the Media mode, press the 

equip-

ment butt

on t

o displ

ay the Media source se-

lection menu again

›››

page 141.

●

Press the  function button.

The output volume of a connected external

audio source should be adjusted to the vol-

ume of the other audio sources.

Adjusting the playback volume

If you need to increase the playback volume

for the external audio source, first lower the

base volume on the radio system.

If the sound from the external audio source is

too low, increase the output volume on the

external audio source, if possible. If this is not

enough, adjust the input volume in the sys-

tem settings to Level 2 or Level 3.

If the sound from the connected external au-

dio source is too loud or distorted, lower the

output volume on the external audio source,

if possible. If this is not enough, change the

input volume to Level 2 or Level 1.

Note

●

When the playback from the e

xternal au-

dio source ends or the connection to the

AUX-IN socket is interrupted, the radio goes

back to the AUX menu.

144

Audio Mode

●

Interfer

ence noise may be heard if the ex-

ternal audio source is powered from the 12-

volt power socket of the vehicle.

●

Please read and observe the manufac-

turer's instruction manual for the external

audio source.

Phone management*

Connection and operation

Requirements for phone management:

our mobil

e phone is connect

ed to the Info-

tainment System through Bluetooth

Connection between the mobile phone

and the Infotainment System

●

Please observe the information on the

page 143, Playback over Bluetooth

●

Press the button 

●

On the Bluetooth

menu of your mobil

phone

, sear

ch the name displayed on screen.

●

If necessary, take into account the

›››

page 143 notifications.

●

To complete the pairing process, respond

to the requests of both devices.

Changing the volume

Media and phone call playback from a con-

nected mobile phone will be conducted

through the speaker of the vehicle.

If voice control is enabled on the mobile

phone connected, voice communication will

also take place through the vehicle speaker.

The playback volume can be modified with

the volume control .

Moreover, the volume of navigation an-

nouncements can be adjusted in the Sound

settings menu.

If the volume of the system is muted (notifica-

tion: ), media sources that are playing on

the connected Smartphone are also interrup-

ted.

WARNING

General, mandatory, legal and country-

specific instructions and laws for the use of

mobil

e phones inside the vehicle must al-

ways be considered.

Note

●

To operat

e the media and phone with

your mobile phone plugged in, please read

the electronic Instructions Manual of the

manufacturer.

●

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices.

You can request information about compat-

ible Bluetooth

products at a SEAT Author-

ised Service or online

Functions of the phone

Fig. 155

Phone disconnected.

Fig. 156 Dial a number with the menu button.

After correctly connecting the phone, you

cam manage the call functions of your

pair

ed mobil

e phone thr

ough the Infotain-

ment System

›››

Fig. 155.

145

Infotainment System

Dial number:

ess the



›››

Fig. 155 function button to dis-

play the dial screen

›››

Fig. 156. Here you can

choose a number with the right switch and

confirm it by pressing. If the number is cor-

rect, the call can be started through the

speaker 

›››

Fig. 156.

Moreover, the following options are available

here:

●

: calls the emergency number

●

: connects to a SEAT fault service

1 )

●

: connects to the SEAT information hot

line

1 )

●

: starts call to your voice mail. For this

purpose, your mailbox number will be reques-

ted the first time you select it.

Phonebook:

Press the 

›››

Fig. 155 function button to

display the phonebook. The phonebook con-

tains all the contacts of your mobile phone,

which you can select one by one with the

right switch and establish a connection by

pressing it, or either access a list with availa-

ble numbers first. For this purpose, during the

first connection, you have to confirm the

transfer of your mobile phone contacts. With

the star key you can save a contact as a fast-

dial number.

Call log:

Press the 

›››

Fig. 155 function button to dis-

play call log. All the calls from your mobile

phone will be shown here once you have

confirmed the transfer of your contacts from

your phone.

●

All: shows all calls in chronological order.

●

: only shows missed calls.

●

: only shows received calls.

●

: only shows outgoing calls.

The  function button bookmarks an entry.

Voice mail:

Press the 

›››

Fig. 155 function button to

access your voice mail inbox. For this pur-

pose, your mailbox number will be requested

the first time you select it.

Emergency call:

1 )

Press the 

›››

Fig. 155 function button to

make an emergency call.

Favourites

Fig. 157 Fast-dial

Fast-dial:

ess the 

›

Fig. 155 function button to

open the fast-dial list

›››

Fig. 157. Select an

empty slot of your fast-dial list to access the

phonebook, where you can choose a contact

as a fast-dial number. Select a used slot to di-

al its corresponding phone number.

Not available in all countries.

146

Audio Mode

Phone calls

Fig. 158 Ongoing call.

Incoming call:

If you r

eceiv

e a call, you hav

e three options:

●

accepting the call with the  function but-

ton.

●

muting the ringtone with the  function

button.

●

rejecting the call with the  function but-

ton.

Active call:

If you accept the incoming call, you have the

following options during the call

›››

Fig. 158:

●

Press the  function key to emit DTMF

tones (e.g. to operate an answering ma-

chine).

●

Press the  function button to pause the

phone call.

●

Press the  function button to mute the mi-

crophone.

●

Press  to end the call.

Settings of a connected phone

Use the  equipment button to access the

phone's settings: The follo

wing options are

available:

Hands-free: If there is an ongoing call, you can

continue the call on the mobil

e phone or transfer it

back to the Infotainment System.

Phone selection: Cycle through the phones r

ec-

ognised by the Infotainment System or search for

new devices.

User profile: Change the settings of the phone

currently connected:

Manage your fast-dial numbers (e.g. delete one).

Set or change voice mail numbers.

Sort your phonebook.

Download your contacts again.

Activate/deactivate mobile phone notifications

when turning off the engine.

Select a ringtone (only if the phone is not emitting

any sounds).

Bluetooth

: Here you can change the connection

settings of the telephone. For instance, you can de-

lete known devices.

Note

●

A device connected thr

ough Bluetooth

if it supports this profile, will always be

used for calls and audio through Blue-

tooth

●

To operate the media and phone with

your mobile phone plugged in, please read

the electronic Instructions Manual of the

manufacturer.

Drive Mii App*

Intr

oduction

Fig. 159 Application connection main menu.

The connected smartphone offers the follow-

ing options:

Navigation o

er the smartphone with

navigation announcements on the r

adio.

ECOTRAINER display.

Driving data notifications.

147

Infotainment System

Notifications from the odometer, etc.

Sear

ch in all fiel

ds.

ou can also use the telephone function of

your connected smartphone over the radio

using the right switch.

Note

To operate the telephone and multimedia

aspects and for navigation with the con-

nected smar

tphone, read the instructions

manual of the manufacturer.

Connection and operation

Requirement: Y

our smartphone is connect

o the radio through USB

›››

page 143 and the

SEAT application to connect the smartphone

to the radio is installed on your smartphone

Place the smartphone in its socket and turn it

on. Removal and installation of the equip-

ment and the socket are described in

›››

page 121.

Connection between smartphone and ra-

dio

●

Press the button 



 to open the main

menu.

●

Afterwards, select and enable the Connec-

tion of the application function with

the settings butt

on.

Once the connection is est

ablished, you can

manage r

adio music playback with the

smartphone. You can start the navigation on

the smartphone and listen to the navigation

announcements on the audio system of the

vehicle.

Instructions for navigation

Acoustic navigation announcements will be

played on the speakers of the vehicle. Re-

garding this, take into account the instruc-

tions in Adjusting the volume

›››

page 148.

You can manage this from the connected

smartphone

›››

page 148.

Changing the volume

Multimedia playback, navigation announce-

ments and phone calls emitted by the con-

nected smartphone will be played on the

speakers of the vehicle.

The volume of the traffic announcement can

be modified with the volume control .

You can also adjust the volume of the naviga-

tion announcements on the Sound settings

menu.

When the volume of the system is muted (no-

tification: ), playback of multimedia sour-

ces played on the connected smartphone is

also interrupted.

Note

●

For more inf

ormation about the installa-

tion and use of the application, see the in-

formation provided with the vehicle.

●

To operate the media and phone and to

navigate with your Smartphone plugged in,

please read the electronic Instructions

Manual of the manufacturer.

●

A device connected through Bluetooth

if it supports this profile, will always be

used for calls and audio through Blue-

tooth

. and connection for applications.

●

Only use compatible Bluetooth

devices.

You can request information about compat-

ible Bluetooth

products at a SEAT Author-

ised Service or online.

For more information about the application re-

garding install

ation and use, take into account

the information provided with the vehicle.

148

Start and driving

Driving

t and driving

opping and starting the

engine

Switching on the ignition and start-

ing the engine

Fig. 160 Vehicle key positions

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 22

Immobiliser display

When an invalid key is used or in the event of

a system fault,  is displayed on the instru-

ment panel. The engine cannot be started.

Pushing or towing

For technical reasons, the vehicle must not

be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is

preferable.

Key not authorised for the vehicle

If a key which is not authorised for this vehicle

is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be re-

moved as follows:

●

Automatic transmission: the key cannot be

removed from the ignition lock. Press and re-

lease the selector lever locking button. Key

can be removed from the vehicle.

●

Manual transmission: Remove the key from

the ignition.

WARNING

Switching off the engine while driving

makes stopping the v

ehicle difficult. As a

consequence you may lose control of the

vehicle and there is a risk of serious acci-

dent.

●

The assisted braking and steering sys-

tems, the airbag system, seat belts and

certain safety equipment are only active

while the engine is running.

●

The engine should only be switched off

when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

While the engine is running or starting it

could help reduce the risk of serious injury.

●

ver start or leave the engine running in

poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Ex-

haust gas contains carbon monoxide, a

toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Car-

bon monoxide can cause people to lose

consciousness. It can also cause death.

●

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the

engine is running. The vehicle could move

off suddenly or something unexpected

could happen resulting in damage and se-

rious injury.

●

Never use start boosters. Cold start

sprays could explode or increase the en-

gine speed unexpectedly.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc.).

●

Never apply additional underseal or anti-

corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,

catalytic converter or the heat shields on

the exhaust system.

149

Driving

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle

key could r

esult in serious injury.

●

Always take all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. If not, the en-

gine could accidentally be started and

electrical equipment such as the windows

could accidentally be operated resulting in

serious injury.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. Passengers could be trap-

ped in the car in an emergency and not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year,

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

CAUTION

●

An attempt to st

art the engine while driv-

ing or starting the engine immediately after

turning it off can cause damage to the en-

gine or starter motor.

●

When the engine is cold, avoid high r

evs

and heavy acceleration and do not make

the engine work hard.

●

Do not push or tow start the engine. Un-

burnt fuel could damage the catalytic con-

verter.

For the sake of the environment

Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start

driving immediat

ely if the visibility is OK

This helps the engine reach operating tem-

perature faster and reduces emissions.

Note

●

If the key is left in the ignition l

ock with

the engine off for long periods, the vehicle

battery will run flat.

●

For automatic gearbox vehicles, the key

can only be removed from the ignition lock

if the gear selector lever is in position P. If

applicable, press and release the locking

button of the selection lever.

●

Electrical devices with a high power con-

sumption are switched off temporarily

when the engine starts.

●

When the engine is started cold, there

may be strong vibrations for a few mo-

ments for technical reasons. This is quite

normal, and no cause for concern.

●

Natural gas engines al

ways start up with

petrol, as a certain operating temperature

is required for running with gas. Once the

required operating temperature is reached,

the engine will change to operate with nat-

ural gas.

Stopping the engine

Switching off the engine

–

Stop the vehicle

›››

–

Turn the ignition key to position

›››

Fig. 160.

Engaging the st

eering wheel l

ock

In v

ehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-

tion key can only be removed when the se-

lector lever is in position N

–

Remove the key from the ignition in posi-

tion

›

Fig. 160

›››

–

Turn the steering wheel until you hear it en-

gage

ossibl

e vehicle theft is prevented with the

steering lock engaged.

Depending upon country.

150

Start and driving

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehi-

cle is moving. Y

ou may lose control of the

vehicle and there is a risk of serious acci-

dent.

●

The airbags and belt tensioners do not

work when the ignition is switched off.

●

The brake servo does not work with the

engine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be

pressed with more force.

●

As the power steering does not work if the

engine is not running, you will need more

strength to steer than normally.

●

If the key is removed from the ignition, the

steering may lock and it will not be possible

to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the engine has been driven at high speed

for a prol

onged period of time, it may over-

heat when turned off. To avoid engine dam-

age, allow the engine to run for approxi-

mately 2 minutes in neutral before switch-

ing it off.

Note

After stopping the engine, the engine com-

partment fan may continue running f

or a

few minutes, even when the ignition has

been switched off or the key removed. The

radiator fan is automatically switched off.

Electronic immobiliser

The gear lock prevents the engine from being

started with an unauthorised k

ey and the ve-

hicle being moved.

The vehicle key has a built-in chip. It automat-

ically deactivates the electronic immobiliser

when the key is inserted into the ignition lock.

The electronic immobilizer will be activated

again automatically as soon as you remove

the key from the ignition lock.

For this reason, the vehicle can only be used

with a genuine SEAT key with the correct

code. Coded keys can be obtained from

SEAT dealerships

›››

page 92.

If an unauthorised key is used, the following

signal appears on the instrument panel dis-

play . The vehicle cannot be started in this

case

Note

The correct operation of the vehicle is only

guaranteed when original SEAT k

eys are

used.

Braking and parking

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty

brake syst

em may lead to serious accident.

●

If you believe the brake pads to be worn

or the brake system to be faulty, immedi-

ately refer to a specialised workshop to

check the brake pads and replace the worn

ones.

WARNING

Careless parking can cause serious injury.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The st

eering lock

may engage and lock the steering wheel

making the vehicle impossible to control.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves, dried grass, spilled fuel, etc.).

●

Always apply the handbrake when you

leave your vehicle and when you park.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the vehicle. They could release the

electronic parking brake, activate the se-

lector lever or gear stick and start the vehi-

cle moving. This could result in a serious

accident.

151

Driving

●

Always t

ake all the keys with you when-

ever you leave the vehicle. The engine

could accidentally be started and electri-

cal equipment such as the windows could

accidentally be operated resulting in seri-

ous injury.

●

Never leave children or disabled people

alone in the car. They could be trapped in

the car in an emergency and will not be

able to get themselves to safety. For exam-

ple, depending on the time of the year,

temperatures inside a locked and closed

vehicle can be extremely high or extremely

low resulting in serious injuries and illness

or even death, particularly for young chil-

dren.

CAUTION

●

Special care should be t

aken when park-

ing in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri-

ers. Objects protruding from the ground

may damage the bumper or other parts of

the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid

damage, stop before the wheels touch the

barrier or kerb.

●

Special attention is required when driving

through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or

other objects. The vehicle underbody,

bumpers, mudguards and running gear,

and the engine and exhaust system could

be damaged as you drive over these ob-

jects.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up

›››

Handbrake applied

›››

page 153.



It lights up

›››

Fault in the brake system

 Do not drive on!

Seek prof

essional advice

›››

page 154.

Brake fluid level inadequate.

 Do not drive on!

Check brak

e fluid level

›››

page 201.

Together with the ABS control lamp : ABS and EBV

do not function.

 Do not drive on!

Seek prof

essional advice

›››

page 154.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

WARNING

Driving with brakes in bad condition could

result in a serious accident.

●

If the brak

e warning lamp  does not

turn off or if it lights up when driving, the

brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or

there is a fault in the brake system. Obtain

professional assistance immediately

›››

page 200, Checking the brake fluid level.

●

If the brake warning lamp  lights up to-

gether with the ABS warning lamp , the

ABS regulation could be malfunctioning. As

a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively

easily when braking. If the rear wheels lock

this could result in loss of vehicle control! If

possible, reduce your speed and drive

carefully to a specialised workshop close

by to check the brake system. During the

following journey, avoid sudden braking

and manoeuvres.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may result in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

152

Start and driving

Handbrake

Fig. 161

Between the front seats: parking

Using the handbrake

●

Pull firmly in an upwards direction on the

handbr

e l

ever while pressing the button.

●

The handbrake is applied when the control

lamp  lights up on the instrument panel

›››

page 152 when the ignition is switched on.

Releasing the handbrake

●

Pull gently in an upwards direction on the

handbrake lever and press the lock button

›››

Fig. 161 (arrow).

●

Move the handbrake lever downwards

keeping the lock button pressed.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the handbrake may re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

Never use the handbr

ake to brake the ve-

hicle except in an emergency. The braking

distance is considerably longer, because

braking is only applied to the rear wheels.

Always use the foot brake.

●

Never drive with the handbrake gently

applied. This can overheat the brake, af-

fecting the brakes system. This also causes

premature wear on the rear brake pads.

●

Never accelerate from the engine com-

partment with the engine running and a

gear engaged. The vehicle could move,

even if the handbrake is applied.

Note

If the vehicle moves at a speed superior to

6 km/h (4 mph) with the handbrak

e ap-

plied, an audible warning is sounded.

Parking

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-

ments shoul

d be observ

ed.

o park the vehicle

Complete operations only in the sequence

given.

●

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface

›››

●

Press and hold the brake pedal until the ve-

hicl

e comes t

o a st

andstill.

●

Apply the handbrake firmly

›››

page 153.

●

For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-

tor lever to position N.

●

Switch off the engine and release the brake

pedal.

●

Remove the key from the ignition.

●

If necessary, turn the steering wheel slightly

to lock the steering.

●

With a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear on

flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear

on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

●

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehi-

cle, especially children.

●

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with

you.

●

Lock the vehicle.

Additional information for steep slopes

and hills

Before switching off the engine, rotate the

steering wheel so that if the vehicle should

move, it will be held by the kerb.

●

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that

they are against the edge of the kerb.

●

Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of

the road.

153

Driving

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire and considerable damage.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as wood,

leaves,dried grass, or spilled fuel).

CAUTION

●

Special care should be t

aken when park-

ing in areas with high kerbs or fixed barri-

ers. Objects protruding from the ground

may damage the bumper or other parts of

the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid

damage, stop before the wheels touch the

barrier or kerb.

●

Special attention is required when driving

through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or

other objects. The vehicle underbody,

bumpers, mudguards and running gear,

and the engine and exhaust system could

be damaged as you drive over these ob-

jects.

Information on the brakes

For the first 200 to 300 km, the ne

w br

pads have not yet reached their maximum

braking capacity, and need to be “run in” first

›››

. The slightly reduced braking effect can

be compensat

ed f

or by incr

easing pressure

on the brake pedal. While running in, the full

braking distance or emergency braking

distance is larger then when the brake pads

have been run in. While running in, avoid full

power braking or situations requiring braking

performance. For example, in heavy traffic.

The rate of wear of the brake pads de-

pends to a great extent on the conditions in

which the vehicle is used and the way the ve-

hicle is driven. If the vehicle is used frequently

in city traffic or for short trips or driven sport

style, visit a specialised workshop regularly,

more frequently than advised in the Mainte-

nance Programme, to have the brake pads

checked.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af-

ter crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall

or even after washing the car, the effect of

the brakes is lessened as the brake discs are

wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher speed,

“dry” the brakes as quickly as possible by

braking gently several times. Only do this

without endangering vehicles behind you or

any other road users

›››

A l

ayer of salt on the discs and br

e pads

will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes

and increase braking distance. If you drive for

a prolonged period on salted roads without

braking then brake carefully several times to

eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes

›››

If the v

ehicl

e r

emains parked for considerable

lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes

are not used, there may be corrosion on the

brake discs and a build up of dirt on the

brake pads. If the brakes are not used fre-

quently, or if rust has formed on the discs,

SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and

discs by braking firmly a few times at a mod-

erately high speed. Only do this without en-

dangering vehicles behind you or any other

road users

›››

aults in the br

e system

During braking, if you notice that the vehicle

does not react as usual (that the braking dis-

tance has increased suddenly) it may be

possible that there is a fault in the braking

system. This is indicated by the warning lamp

. Take the vehicle to a specialised work-

shop immediately and have the fault re-

paired. Drive at a moderate speed and be

prepared to use more pressure on the brake

pedal, and allow for longer stopping distan-

ces.

Brake servo

The brake servo only operates when the en-

gine is running and the pressure applied by

the driver on the brake pedal increases.

If the brake servo does not operate or the ve-

hicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will

have to be pressed with more force given that

the braking distance will be increased when

the brake servo does not operate

›››

154

Start and driving

WARNING

New brake pads do not brake to full effi-

ciency.

●

For the first 320 km, new brake pads have

not yet reached their maximum braking ca-

pacit

y, and need to be “run in” first. For this,

to compensate for reduced braking effi-

ciency the brake pedal will have to be

pressed with more force.

●

To avoid losing control of the vehicle and

causing serious accidents, always take

great care when driving with new brake

pads.

●

When running in new brake pads, always

respect the safety distances between you

and other vehicles and do not cause situa-

tions requiring extreme braking perform-

ance.

WARNING

When brakes overheat, braking is less effi-

cient and braking distances incr

ease.

●

When driving on slopes, brakes can be

overloaded and overheat quickly.

●

Reduce speed or change down a gear

when faced with steep and long slopes.

This allows you to use the engine braking

effect and to reduce the strain on the brake

system.

●

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers

could restrict the airflow to the brakes and

cause them to overheat.

WARNING

Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take

longer to engage and this incr

eases brak-

ing distances.

●

Test the brakes carefully.

●

Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt

by braking gently several times, when visi-

bility, weather, and road and traffic condi-

tions permit.

WARNING

Driving without the brake servo may signifi-

cantly increase the braking dist

ance and

result in a severe accident.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move forwards

when the engine is switched off.

●

If the brake servo does not operate or the

vehicle must be towed, then the brake ped-

al will have to be pressed with more force

given that the braking distance will be in-

creased when the brake servo does not op-

erate.

CAUTION

●

Never mak

e the brakes “slip” by pressing

the pedal gently, if it is not really necessa-

ry to brake. Continuously pressing on the

brake pedal will heat the brakes. This could

significantly reduce braking power, in-

crease braking distance or even result in

the total failure of the brake system.

●

Reduce speed or change down a gear

when f

aced with steep and long slopes.

This allows you to use the engine braking

effect and to reduce the strain on the brake

system. Otherwise, the brakes may over-

heat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce

speed or to stop.

Note

Make use, when having the front brake

pads check

ed, and have the r

ear pads

checked also. The thickness of the brake

pads should be checked visually and regu-

larly, by looking through the openings in

the wheel rims or from underneath the ve-

hicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to

check them thoroughly. SEAT recommends

taking your car in for technical service.

155

Driving

Braking and stability sys-

ems

arning and contr

ol lamps



It lights up

›››

ESC* disconnected by the system.

Turn the ignition on and off. If necessary, drive for a

short distance.

Fault in the ESC*.

Go to a specialised workshop

Along with the ABS control lamp : fault in the ABS.

Go to a specialised w

orkshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.

The battery has been reconnected

›››

page 202.



Flashes

ESC* or ASR regulating.

Stop pressing the gas pedal

. Adjust your driving style

to the road conditions.



It lights up

›››

Traction Control* faulty or switched off by the sys-

tem.

Go to a specialised w

orkshop.



Flashes

Traction Control* regulator in operation.

Lift off your fit from the gas pedal. Adjust your driving

yle to the road conditions.



It lights up

›››

Along with the ESC* control lamp: f

ault in the ABS.

Go to a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be

braked without ABS.

Together with the warning lamp : ABS and EBV do

not function.

 Do not drive on!

Seek prof

essional advice

›››

page 154.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

WARNING

●

If the ABS warning lamp

 does not go

out or if it lights up while driving, the ABS is

not working properly. The vehicle can only

be stopped using normal braking without

ABS. The protection pr

ovided by the ABS is

not available. Visit a specialised workshop

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may r

esult in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

Brake assist systems

The assist

ed brake systems are the elec-

onic distribution of br

aking force (EBV), the

anti-lock brake system (ABS), the brake assist

system (BAS), the electronic differential lock

(EDL), traction control (TC)*, the traction

control system (ASR) and the electronic sta-

bility control (ESC*).

The brake assistance systems only operate

when the ignition is switched on. They con-

tribute significantly to increasing active safe-

ty.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*

ESC* reduces the risk of skidding and increa-

ses the vehicle stability by braking individual

wheels under specific driving conditions.

ESC* detects critical handling situations,

such as understeer, oversteer and wheelspin

on the driven wheels. The system stabilises

156

Start and driving

the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by

educing the engine t

que.

The ESC* has limits. It is important to realise

that ESC* is also subject to the laws of phys-

ics. ESC* will not be able to deal with all sit-

uations with which drivers may be faced. For

example, if the road surface changes sud-

denly then ESC* will not be useful in all ca-

ses. If the vehicle suddenly enters a section

covered by water, mud or snow then ESC*

will not provide assistance in the same way

as on dry ground. If the vehicle loses its grip

on the ground and moves on a film of water

(“aquaplaning”), the ESC* will not be able to

help the driver control the vehicle due to the

loss of adherence with the road surface pre-

venting braking and steering. If the vehicle is

driven through series of bends at high speed,

the ESC* will not always be as effective: ag-

gressive driving is not the same as slow driv-

ing.

Adjust your speed and driving style to suit vis-

ibility, and weather, road and traffic condi-

tions. ESC* cannot push the limits of the laws

of physics; improve the transmission available

or maintain the vehicle on the road if a lack of

driver attention creates an inevitable situa-

tion. Otherwise, ESC* assists in maintaining

vehicle control in extreme situations and uses

the movements of the steering made by the

driver to maintain the vehicle moving in the

desired direction. If the vehicle is driven at

such a speed that it will leave the road before

ESC* can intervene then the system cannot

provide assistance.

The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are in-

corporated into the ESC*. The ESC* is al-

ways on

Anti-lock system (ABS)

ABS can prevent the wheels from locking dur-

ing braking until just before the vehicle stops

thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle

and maintain control. This means that, even

during full braking, the risk of skidding is re-

duced:

●

Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do not

remove your foot from the brake pedal or re-

duce braking force!

●

Do not “pump” the brake pedal, or reduce

braking force!

●

Maintain vehicle direction when braking

fully.

●

When the brake pedal is released or when

the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off.

ABS control can be observed by vibration of

the brake pedal and noise. You should never

expect the ABS to reduce the braking dis-

tance under any circumstances. This dis-

tance will increase when driving on gravel, re-

cent snow or on icy or slippery ground.

Brake assist system (BAS)

The brake assistance system may reduce the

required braking distance. The brake assis-

tance system boosts the braking force if you

press the brake pedal quickly in an emergen-

cy. As a result, the braking pressure increases

rapidly, the braking force is multiplied and the

braking distance is reduced. This enables the

ABS to be activated more quickly and effec-

tively.

Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal!

When the brake pedal is released or when

the brake force is reduced, brake assist auto-

matically turns off the brake servo.

Traction control system (ASR) or Traction

Control (TC)*

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control

system ASR or TC reduces the engine torque

to match the amount of grip available. The

ASR or TC makes some situations easier, for

example, when starting, accelerating or go-

ing uphill, even in unfavourable road condi-

tions.

Depending on the version.

157

Driving

Electronic differential lock (EDS)

EDL is av

ail

abl

e when driving in straight lines

under normal conditions. When the EDL de-

tects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel

and directs the power to the other one. To

prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel

from overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-

cally if subjected to excessive loads. The EDL

will switch on again automatically when the

brake has cooled down.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery or wet

ground can result in l

oss of vehicle control

and serious injury to the driver and passen-

gers.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Even though the brake assist systems, ABS,

BAS, EDL, ASR and ESC* provide more se-

curity, do not take unnecessary risks while

driving.

●

Brake assistance systems can not over-

come the laws of physics. Even with ESC*

and other systems, slippery and wet roads

will always be dangerous.

●

Driving to quickly on wet ground can re-

sult in the wheels losing contact with the

ground in an effect known as “aquaplan-

ing”. Without adherence, it is impossible to

brake, steer or control the vehicle.

●

Brake assistance systems cannot avoid

accidents if, for example, the driver does

not respect safety distances or drives to

quickly in difficult conditions.

●

Even though brake assistance systems

are extr

emely effective and help control

the vehicle in difficult situations, remember

that the vehicle stability depends on tyre

grip.

●

When accelerating on a slippery surface,

for example on ice or snow, press the ac-

celerator carefully. The wheels can still slip

even with brake assistance systems result-

ing in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

The effectiveness of the ESC* can be con-

siderably reduced if other components and

syst

ems affecting driving dynamics are not

maintained or are not functioning correct-

ly. This includes, among others, brakes,

tyres and other systems already men-

tioned.

●

Remember that changing and fitting oth-

er components to the vehicle can affect

operation of the ABS, BAS, ASR TC, EDL and

ESC*.

●

Changes to the vehicle suspension or us-

ing unapproved wheel/tyre combinations

can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASR,

TC, EDL and ESC* and their effectiveness.

●

Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC* de-

pends on the use of suitable tyres

›››

page 206.

Note

●

To ensure that the ESC*, ASR and T

work properly, all four wheels must be fit-

ted with identical tyres. Any differences in

the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the

system to reduce engine power when this is

not desired.

●

If a malfunction should occur in the ABS,

the ESC*, ASR, TC and EDL will also be af-

fected.

●

Noises may be heard while any of the

above systems are operating.

Changing gear

Intr

oduction

When reverse gear is engaged and the ig-

nition is s

wit

ched on the f

ollowing takes

place:

●

Reverse lights light up.

●

The rear wiper blade performs one move-

ment when the windscreen wiper is activated.

●

If necessary, connect the parking distance

warning system.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac-

tion and skidding, especially on slippery

ground. This could cause l

oss of control of

158

Start and driving

the vehicle resulting in an accident and

considerable damage

●

Use rapid acceleration only when visibili-

ty, weather, road conditions and traffic per-

mit.

WARNING

Do not allow the brakes to “rub” for a pro-

onged period of time, or br

ake frequently

or for long periods of time. Continuous

braking heats up the brakes. This could sig-

nificantly reduce braking power, increase

braking distance or even result in the total

failure of the brake system.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up

Place the automatic gearbox lever in the position 

and do not press the brak

e pedal.

Press the brake pedal to select a list of gears.

Near the blinking display on the instrument panel

display: the gearbox l

evel of automatic transmission

is not in position , which is required to start the en-

gine.

Move the gearbox lever to position  and start the en-

gine.



Flashes

An automatic gearbox in the vehicle does not guar-

antee that the vehicl

e will not roll away.

Engage the handbrake.



Flashes

On the instrument panel display, near the required

control lamp

, press the brake pedal : requirement

to start the engine.

Move the gearshift lever to the  position and start

the engine.

On the instrument panel display: while driving for-

ward, try t

o move the gearbox level to position .

Stop the vehicle and move the gearbox lever to posi-

tion  in order to change the position afterwards .

On the instrument panel display: the gearbox lever of

an automatic transmission mas mo

ved to position 

or , but the brake pedal was not operated.

Operate the brake pedal, move the gearbox lever to

position  and then to the desired position  or .

When switching on the ignition some warning

and indication l

amps light up f

or a short time

o check the operations. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

Manual gear change

Fig. 162

Gear shift pattern of a 5-speed man-

ual gearbo

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 28

Shifting down a gear

Shifting down a gear while driving must be

carried out gear by gear, i.e. to the gear im-

mediately preceding the current gear and at

an engine speed that is not excessive

›››

. At

high speeds, or high engine speeds, skipping

one or v

arious gears when shifting do

wn a

gear can cause damage t

o the clutch and

the gearbox, even if the clutch is not engaged

during the process

›››

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will

start t

o move as soon as a gear is engaged

and the clutch released.

159

Driving

●

Never engage the r

everse gear when a

vehicle is moving forward.

WARNING

As a consequence of shifting down a gear

incorr

ectly, you may lose contr

ol of the ve-

hicle and cause an accident with serious

consequences.

CAUTION

If, at high speeds or high engine speeds,

the gear lev

er is shifted down to a gear that

is too low, serious damage can be caused

to the clutch and gearbox. This may also

happen if you press the clutch pedal and it

does not engage.

CAUTION

To prevent damage and avoid premature

wear, pl

ease observe the following:

●

While driving, do not leave your hand

resting on the gear stick. The pressure ap-

plied by your hand is transmitted to the

gearbox selector forks.

●

Always ensure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped before engaging the re-

verse gear.

●

When changing gear, always make sure

the clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor.

●

Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” on

hills with the engine on.

Automatic gear change

Fig. 163

Automatic gearbox diagram of gears

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 28

Move the selector lever to the N position to:

●

Starting up the engine

●

Remove the key from the ignition switch

●

Engage the steering wheel lock

Move the selector lever to the D or R position

to:

●

Park the vehicle

●

Repair a puncture

●

Changing a wheel

To move the gear selector lever from the po-

sition N to D or to R, first press and hold the

brake pedal.

In the instrument panel display, with the igni-

tion switched on, the selected gear range or

the gear engaged in the gearbox is shown.

 - Reverse gear

Reverse gear is selected. Engage only when

the vehicle is stopped.

 - Neutral

The gearbox is in neutral. No movement is

transmitted to the wheels and the engine

does not act as a brake.

 - Standard driving position

The gears are changed (up and down) auto-

matically. The gear shifts are determined by

the engine load, your individual driving style

and the speed of the vehicle.

 - Tiptronic driving position (manual shift

programme)

All gears can be changed (up and down)

manually

›››

page 161. This is possible as

long as the system is not changing gear au-

tomatically due to a traffic situation.

WARNING

Placing the selector lever in an incorrect

position may cause loss of control of the

ehicle and a serious accident.

●

Do not press the accelerator when en-

gaging a range of gears.

160

Start and driving

●

With the engine running and a gear range

select

ed, the vehicle will move when the

accelerator is pressed.

●

Never engage reverse gear while driving.

●

Unintentional movements of the vehicle

could cause serious injury.

●

As a driver, you should never leave your

vehicle if the engine is running and a gear

range is engaged. If you have to leave your

vehicle while the engine is running, you

must always apply the handbrake and put

the selector lever in position N.

●

Never engage the R gear range when the

vehicle is moving.

●

Never leave the vehicle without applying

the handbrake. With the engine running the

vehicle moves downhill regardless of the

gear range selected.

Note

If, while driving, the selector lever is acci-

dentally placed in position N, lift your f

oot

off the accelerator. Wait until the engine is

running at idle speed before selecting a

new gear range.

Engaging gear with Tiptronic

Fig. 164

Lever in the Tiptronic position

With Tiptronic, the gears can be changed up

or do

wn manually with the aut

omatic gear

box. When you change to the Tiptronic pro-

gramme, the vehicle remains in the currently

selected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automatically

due to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic

●

Place the lever in the position D to the left

on the Tiptronic shift gate M

›››

in Auto-

matic gear change on page 160.

●

Press the lever forwards

or backwards

–

to move up or down a gear

›

Fig. 164.

●

Place the lever back to the position M to the

left on the Tiptronic shift gate, to leave Tip-

tronic mode

›››

in Automatic gear change

on page 160.

With the lever in the position D, and pr

essing

orw

ards

or backwards

–

the Tiptronic

ogr

amme can be sel

ected M.

CAUTION

●

When accelerating, the gearbo

x auto-

matically shifts up into the next gear short-

ly before the maximum engine speed is

reached.

●

When reducing speed manually, the

gearbox only shifts gear when the engine

can no longer exceed the maximum engine

speed.

Driving with automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-

cally as the v

ehicl

e mo

ves.

Driving down hills

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear

you will need to select. The lowest gears in-

crease the engine braking work. Never go

down hills with the selector lever in neutral N.

●

You should reduce speed accordingly.

●

Place the lever in the position D to the left

on the Tiptronic shift gate M

›››

page 161.

●

Gently pull the selector lever back

–

change do

wn a gear

161

Driving

Starting when going up a slope

The st

eeper the gr

adient, the l

ower the gear

you will need.

When stopping on a slope with a gear range

engaged, the vehicle must be prevented from

rolling backwards by always pressing the

brake pedal or pulling the handbrake lever

up. When starting, release the brake pedal or

the handbrake

›››

Kick

-do

The kick

down system provides maximum ac-

celeration when the gear selector lever is in

the position D, or in the Tiptronic position M.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right

down, the automatic gearbox will shift down

to a lower gear, depending on road speed

and engine speed. This takes advantage of

the maximum acceleration of the vehicle

›››

When the accel

or is pressed to the floor,

the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear

only after the engine reaches the specified

maximum engine speed.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of trac-

tion and skidding, especially on slippery

ground. This could cause l

oss of control of

the vehicle resulting in an accident and se-

rious injury.

●

Always adapt your driving st

yle to suit

the flow of traffic.

●

Only use the kick-down function or rapid

acceleration if visibility, weather, road and

traffic conditions so permit.

●

Never put other road users in danger by

accelerating or with your driving style.

CAUTION

If you stop on a hill with a gear range en-

gaged, do not try t

o pre

vent the vehicle

from rolling back by pressing on the accel-

erator. Otherwise, the automatic gearbox

may overheat causing damage.

Automatic gearbox malfunction

Control lamps



It lights up red

Fault in the automatic gearbox.

 Do not drive on!

Seek prof

essional advice. Failure to do so could re-

sult in considerable damage to the transmission.



It lights up yellow

In the automatic gearbox the gears can engage in-

correctly.

Swit

ch the ignition on and off. When the control lamp

does not light up, find the nearest specialised work-

shop and have the automatic gearbox checked.

The automatic gearbox overheats temporarily.

Let the transmission cool with the gearbo

x lever in

the position . When the control lamp does not light

up, find the nearest specialised workshop and have

the automatic gearbox checked.



It lights up

Along with the yellow control lamp for transmission

temperat

ure : the automatic gearbox overheats.

Press the brake pedal and let it cool down. Avoid

pressing the accelerator. When the control lamp

does not light up, find the nearest specialised work-

shop and have the automatic gearbox checked.

Back-up programme

When aut

omatic gearbo

x w

arning and indi-

cation lamps light up on the instrument panel,

there may be a system malfunction

›››

page 158. In the event of some faults the

automatic gearbox functions using a backup

programme. When the programme is activa-

ted, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however,

at low speeds and within a selected range of

gears.

With the manual gearbox, in some cases it is

not possible to drive with all the gears.

162

Start and driving

In all cases the automatic gearbox must be

check

ed at a specialised w

orkshop

Automatic gearbox overheating

The automatic gearbox can overheat with a

prolonged start up, or when stopping and

starting continuously. This overheating is dis-

played with a warning lamp  in the instru-

ment panel. Additionally, an audible warning

can be heard. Stop and let the gearbox cool

›››

The v

ehicl

e mo

ves forward or back de-

spite having selected a gear range

When the vehicle does not move in the re-

quired direction, the system may not have the

gear range correctly engaged. Press the

brake pedal and engage the gear range

again. If the vehicle still does not move in the

required direction, there is a system malfunc-

tion. Seek specialist assistance and have the

system checked.

CAUTION

●

When the gearbox is displayed as o

ver-

heating for the first time, the vehicle must

be parked safely or must be driven at a

speed of more than 20 km/h (12 mph).

●

When the warning lamp lights up and the

audible warning is heard, the vehicle must

be parked safely and the engine switched

off. Let the gearbox cool down.

●

To pre

vent damage to the gearbox, driv-

ing must only be continued when the warn-

ing lamps are no longer lit up. While the

gearbox is overheated, starting up and

driving, even at a slow speed should be

avoided.

Recommended gear display

In some vehicles, the recommended gear for

reducing fuel consumption is displayed on

the instrument panel:

Display Meaning



Optimum gear.



Recommendation to change up a

gear.



Recommendation t

o change down a

gear.

WARNING

The recommended gear display is intended

as a guideline only; it should nev

er replace

the driver's attention to driving carefully.

●

Responsibility for selecting the correct

gear for each situation continues to lie with

the driver, for example when overtaking or

climbing a hill.

For the sake of the environment

Selecting the most appropriate gear for the

situation will help you to sav

e fuel.

Note

The recommended gear display is switched

off when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Steering

Information rel

ating to different ve-

hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering assists

the driv

er when st

eering.

ectro-mechanical power steering adapts

electronically to the speed of the car, torque

and turning angle.

If the power steering should fail at any time or

the engine is switched off (for instance when

being towed), the car can still be steered, as

long as the key remains in the ignition. How-

ever, more effort than normal will be required

to turn the steering wheel.

Steering column mechanical lock

To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the

steering before leaving the vehicle.

163

Driving

Lock the steering column by removing the key

om the ignition when the v

ehicl

e is stopped.

Please engage steering lock

Park the vehicle

›››

page 151.

Remove the key from the ignition.

Turn the steering wheel slightly until you hear the

steering lock

Unlocking the steering

Insert the key in the ignition lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the steer-

ing lock.

Hol

d the steering wheel in this position and switch on

the ignition.

WARNING

If the power steering is not working then the

steering wheel is much more difficult t

turn and the vehicle more difficult to con-

trol.

●

The power steering only works when the

engine is running.

●

Never allow the vehicle to move when the

engine is switched off.

●

Never remove the key from the ignition if

the vehicle is in motion. The steering may

lock and it will not be possible to turn the

steering wheel.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up red

The electromechanical steering is damaged.

Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and

as soon as possible.

Have the steering checked immediately by a special-

ised workshop.



It lights up yellow

Hindereed operation of the electromechanic steer-

ing.

The steering system shoul

d be checked by a special-

ised workshop as soon as possible.

If, after restarting the engine and driving for a short

distance, the yellow warning lamp no longer comes

on, it will not be necessary to take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop.



Flashes red

Fault in the steering column electronic lock.

 Do not continue driving! Seek specialist assis-

tance.



It flashes yellow

Twisted steering column.

Swing the steering wheel a f

ew times.

Not unlocked or blocked steering column.

Remov

e the key from the ignition and then switch the

ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages

displayed on the instrument panel display.

Do not drive on, if the steering column remains

locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek

specialist assistance.

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may result in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

164

Start and driving

Run-in and economical driv-

ing

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in

new components.

Running-in the engine

The engine needs to be run in o

ver the first

1,500 km. During its first few hours of running,

the internal friction in the engine is greater

than later on when all the moving parts have

bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1,500 km

influences the future engine performance.

Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be

driven at a moderate speed, especially when

the engine is cold, as this will reduce engine

wear and increase its useful life. Never drive

at extremely low engine speeds. Change

down to a lower gear when the engine no

longer runs “smoothly”. Up to 1,000 kilome-

tres the following instructions apply:

●

Do not use full throttle.

●

Do not force the engine above two thirds of

its maximum speed.

Between 1,000 and 1,500 kil

ometres,

gradually increase power until reaching the

maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

●

Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres

›››

page 206

●

Notes on the brakes

›››

page 151

For the sake of the environment

If the engine is run in gently, the life of the

engine will be increased and the engine oil

consumption reduced.

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority in

the design, choice of mat

erial

s and manuf

ac-

ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-

cycling

●

Joints and connections designed for easy

dismantling.

●

Modular construction to facilitate disman-

tling.

●

Increased use of single-grade materials.

●

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in

accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and

ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

●

Use of recycled materials.

●

Use of compatible plastics in the same part

if its components are not easily separated.

●

Use of recycled materials and/or materials

originating from renewable sources.

●

Reduction of volatile components, including

odour, in plastic materials.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions

dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,

hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

●

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the

protective wax for cavities.

●

Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-

cle transport.

●

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

●

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-

tems.

●

Recycling and energy recovery from resi-

dues (RDF).

●

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

●

Use of systems for the recovery of residual

heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,

etc.).

●

The use of water-soluble paints.

165

Driving

Economical and environmentally

friendly driving

Fig. 165

Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km

at 2 diff

ent outside t

emperatures

Fuel consumption, environmental impact and

engine

, br

e and tyre wear depend largely

on three factors:

●

Personal driving style.

●

Conditions of use (weather, road surface).

●

Technical requirements.

Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption are

possible with an appropriate driving style and

the adoption of certain simple tips.

Changing gear early

General remarks: the highest gear is always

the most economical. As a guide, for most ve-

hicles at a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph), drive

in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth

gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear.

In addition, “skipping” gears when shifting up

helps to save fuel, weather and traffic condi-

tions permitting.

Do not wait until the last moment before

changing gear. Only use first gear when you

move off and change to second gear quickly.

Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with

automatic gearbox.

Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve

an economical driving style as the display in-

dicates the best moment to change gear.

Let the vehicle roll

If you take your foot off the accelerator, the

fuel supply is stopped and consumption is re-

duced.

Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating,

for example when approaching a red traffic

light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too

slowly or the distance is too long, the clutch

pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en-

gine will then operate at idle speed.

If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for a

period of time, switch off the engine; for ex-

ample, while waiting at a level crossing.

Think ahead and “flow” with the traffic

Frequent acceleration and braking consider-

ably increase fuel consumption. If you think

ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance

from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow

down by simply lifting your foot off the accel-

erator. This eliminates the need for constant

braking and acceleration.

Calm and steady driving

A constant driving style is more important

than speed: a constant driving style will entail

lower fuel consumption.

When driving on the motorway, it is more effi-

cient to drive at a constant and more moder-

ate speed than to be continuously accelerat-

ing and braking. As a general rule, you will

reach your destination just as quickly when

you drive at a constant speed.

The cruise control function helps you to ach-

ieve a constant style of driving.

Moderate use of additional devices

It is important to travel in comfort, but con-

venience systems should be used ecological-

ly.

Some equipment, when connected, increase

fuel consumption considerably, for example:

●

Air conditioning cooling system: If the air

conditioning system is required to cool to sig-

nificantly lower temperatures than the true

outside temperature, it will require a large

amount of energy from the engine. Therefore,

we recommend that the selected

166

Start and driving

temperature for the vehicle is not too different

o the outside t

emper

ature. It is a good idea

to air the vehicle before starting your journey

and to drive a short distance with the win-

dows open. Then you can close the windows

and switch on the air conditioning. Keep win-

dows closed when travelling at high speeds.

Driving with the windows open increases fuel

consumption.

●

Switch off the seat heating when the seats

have warmed up.

●

Switch off the heated rear window when it

is not moist or covered in ice.

Avoid short journeys

Fuel consumption is much higher when the

engine is cold, immediately after it has been

started. It takes a few kilometres of driving for

the engine to warm up and to normalise con-

sumption.

The engine and catalytic converter need to

reach their proper working temperature in

order to minimise fuel consumption and emis-

sions. The ambient temperature has a deci-

sive influence.

Fig. 165 shows the difference in consumption

for the same journey at +20°C (+68°F) and at

-10°C (+14°F).

Therefore, unnecessary short journeys should

be avoided. Try to combine trips.

The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in

summer, even when other conditions are the

same.

The engine takes a long time to warm up

when it is idling. In addition, mechanical wear

and pollutant emissions are also especially

high during this initial warm-up phase. It is

therefore best to drive off immediately after

starting the engine. Doing this avoids running

the engine at a high speed.

Adjusting type pressures.

Having the correct pressure in your tyres

helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a

result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing

the tyre pressure slightly (+0.2

bar/+3 psi/+200 kPa) can help to save fuel.

When you buy new tyres, make sure they are

optimised for minimum rolling resistance.

Use low friction engine oil

The use of low viscosity totally synthetic oils,

known as low friction engine oil, helps to re-

duce fuel consumption. These oils reduce the

resistance caused by friction in the engine,

they flow around the engine more quickly

and efficiently, particularly in cold starts. The

effect is particularly noticeable in vehicles

frequently used for short journeys.

Always check the engine oil level and ob-

serve service intervals (engine oil change in-

tervals).

When purchasing engine oil, always observe

legal requirements and ensure that the oil is

approved by SEAT.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

The lighter the vehicle, the more economical

and ecological the driving style. For example,

an additional weight of 100 kg will increase

fuel consumption up to 0.3 l/100 km.

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads

from the vehicle.

Remove optional equipment and unneces-

sary accessories

The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower

the fuel consumption. Optional equipment

and accessories (such as roof racks or bike

carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of

the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you remove all op-

tional and unnecessary equipment and

racks, especially if you intend to drive at high

speeds.

Other factors which increase fuel con-

sumption (examples):

●

Fault in engine management.

●

Driving on hills.

167

Driving

WARNING

Always adapt your speed and the distance

to the vehicl

es ahead in line with visibility,

weather conditions, the condition of the

road and the traffic situation.

Engine management and ex-

haust gas purification sys-

tem

Introduction

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system

reach very high t

emperatures. This could

cause a fire.

●

Always park your vehicle so that no part

of the exhaust system can come in contact

with flammable materials (such as dried

grass).

●

Never apply additional underseal or anti-

corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes,

catalytic converter or the heat shields on

the exhaust system.

Control and warning lamps



It lights up

Fault in the management of the petrol engine.

Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop

as soon as possible.



It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.

Reduce speed and drive car

efully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.



Flashes

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic

converter

Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-

cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

CAUTION

Always pay attention to any lit control

lamps and to the corr

esponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to

the vehicle.

Note

While the  or  contr

ol lamps remain lit,

the engine may have faults, there will be

higher fuel consumption and a possible

loss of engine power.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter permits the subse-

quent treatment of the exhaust gases thus r

ducing contaminating gas emissions. To en-

sure a longer working life for the exhaust sys-

tem and catalytic converter in a petrol en-

gine:

●

Always use unleaded petrol.

●

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

●

Do not top up with too much engine oil

›››

page 195.

●

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter

cables

›››



page 44.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running

or loss of power when the car is moving, re-

duce speed immediately. Have the car in-

spected by a specialised workshop. If this

happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust

system and escape into the atmosphere. The

catalytic converter can also be damaged by

overheating.

168

Start and driving

For the sake of the environment

Even when the emission control system is

working perfectly, ther

e may be a smell of

sulphur under certain conditions. This de-

pends on the sulphur content of the fuel

used.

Driving tips

Driving abroad

In some countries, certain safety regulations

and r

equir

ements ar

e in force relating to ex-

haust gas emissions, which differ from the

technical characteristics of the vehicle. Be-

fore travelling abroad, SEAT recommends

you consult a technical service about the le-

gal requirements and the following points:

●

Does the vehicle need technical modifica-

tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust-

ment of the headlamps?

●

Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag-

nostics equipment and spare parts required

for inspections and repairs?

●

Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina-

tion country?

●

For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol avail-

able at the right octane rating?

●

Are a suitable engine oil (

›››

page 195) and

other engine fluids complying with SEAT

specifications available in the destination

country?

●

Are special tyres required in the destination

country?

CAUTION

SEAT does not accept liability for any dam-

age to the vehicl

e due to the use of a lower

quality fuel, an inadequate service or the

non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driving through flooded roadways

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv-

ing thr

ough w

er, for example, along a floo-

ded road, please observe the following:

●

Check the depth of the water before enter-

ing the flooded zone. The water should never

come above the lower edge of the bodywork

›››

●

Do not drive faster than a pedestrian.

●

Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear

or s

wit

ch off the engine

●

Oncoming traffic will cause waves which

raise the level of the water, making it difficult

to cross the water.

●

Disconnect the Start-Stop system whenev-

er crossing water.

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, melted

snow, et

c., please remember that due to

damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in

winter, the braking effect may be delayed,

therefore the required braking distance is

greater.

●

“Dry the brakes and remove ice” by brak-

ing carefully. Ensure that you are not en-

dangering other road-users or breaking

traffic regulations in the process.

●

After driving through water, avoid sudden

sharp manoeuvres.

CAUTION

●

Driving through flooded ar

eas may se-

verely damage vehicle components such

as the engine, transmission, drive train or

electrical system.

●

Never drive through salt water as salt

causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of

the vehicle which have been in contact with

salt water.

169

Driving

Driver assistance systems

-Stop system

Control lamps



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is enabled.



Flashes

The Start-stop system is not available.

Go to a specialised workshop



It lights up

The Start-Stop system is enabled but the engine

cannot be automatically stopped.

Go t

o a specialised workshop.



It lights up

The Start-stop system cannot start the engine.

Start the vehicl

e manually with the key

›››

page 149.

There is a fault in the alternator

›››

page 202.

Some control and warning lamps will light up

briefly when the ignition is s

wit

ched on t

check certain functions. They will switch off

after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 27.

Start-Stop system

Fig. 166

In the centre console, top section:

art

-st

op system.

With the Start-Stop system enabled, the en-

gine is aut

omatically st

opped when the v

ehi-

cle is at a standstill. It will start again auto-

matically as required.

This function remains enabled while the igni-

tion is switched on. The instrument panel dis-

play shows information on the current status

›››

page 170.

Disconnect the Start-Stop system by hand

whenever crossing water.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

●

When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neu-

tral and release the clutch pedal. The engine

will stop.

●

To restart, simply engage the clutch.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

●

When the vehicle is at a standstill, depress

the brake or keep it pressed down. The en-

gine switches off.

●

The engine will start again as soon as you

release the brake pedal.

●

With the selector lever set to position N, the

engine will not start until a range of gears is

selected or the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

Important conditions for the engine to stop

automatically

●

The driver's seat belt must be fastened.

●

The driver door must be closed.

●

The bonnet must be closed.

●

The engine must have reached a minimum

temperature.

●

The vehicle must have moved since the last

time the engine was stopped.

●

The vehicle's battery must be sufficiently

charged.

●

The battery temperature must not be too

low or too high.

170

Driver assistance systems

●

The v

ehicl

e must not be on a v

ery steep

slope.

Conditions for the engine to restart auto-

matically

The engine can be automatically restarted in

the following cases:

●

If the vehicle starts to moves.

●

If the battery voltage drops.

Conditions requiring engine start-up using

the key

The engine has to be manually started in the

following cases:

●

If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

●

If the driver door is opened.

●

If the bonnet is opened.

Switching the Start-Stop system on and

off

●

Press the button  situated in the centre

console

›››

Fig. 166.

●

The button will light up when the Start-Stop

system is switched off.

The engine will start immediately if the vehi-

cle is in Stop mode when the system is

switched off by hand.

WARNING

The smart technology included in the hill

hold cannot change the laws of physics. Do

not l

et the extra convenience afforded by

the hill hold tempt you into taking any risks

when driving.

●

Any accidental movement of the vehicle

could result in serious injury.

●

The hill hold is not a replacement for driv-

er awareness.

●

Adjust your speed and driving style to vis-

ibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

●

The hill hold cannot always keep the ve-

hicle at a standstill on a slope or brake suf-

ficiently when travelling downhill (e.g. on

slippery or frozen surfaces).

WARNING

The brake servo and the electromechani-

cal steering do not work when the engine is

witched off.

●

The vehicle must never be allowed to

move with the engine switched off.

●

Disconnect the Start-Stop system before

working in the engine compartment.

CAUTION

The vehicle's battery could be damaged if

the vehicle is used f

or long periods at very

high outside temperatures.

Note

In some cases, it may be necessary to start

the engine by hand using the key. Ref

er to

the corresponding control lamp on the in-

strument panel.

Cruise control system

(CCS)*

Control lamp



It lights up

This cruise control system maintains the set speed of

the vehicle

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

171

Driving

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may result in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

Cruise control operation

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 26

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to in-

dividually maintain the set speed when driv-

ing forwards from approx. 20 km/h (15 mph).

The CCS only slows down by reducing the

accelerator but not by braking

›››

elling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot

maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle

down using the brake pedal and reduce

gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched

off automatically or temporarily:

●

If the system detects a fault that could af-

fect the working order of the CCS.

●

If you increase the stored speed by press-

ing the accelerator pedal for a certain time.

●

If the brake pedal is pressed.

●

If the gear is changed with the manual

gearbox.

●

If the airbag is triggered.

WARNING

Use of the cruise control could cause acci-

dents and sever

e injuries if it is not possible

to drive at a constant speed maintaining

the safety distance.

●

Do not use the cruise control in heavy

traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in

front is insufficient, on steep roads, with

several bends or in slippery circumstances

(snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo-

ded roads.

●

Never use the CCS when driving off-road

or on unpaved roads.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

To avoid unexpected operation of the

cruise control system, turn it off every time

you finish using it.

●

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is

too high for the prevailing road, traffic or

weather conditions.

●

When travelling down hills, the CCS can-

not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle

tends to accelerate under its own weight.

Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to

slow the vehicle.

Parking distance warning

syst

em*

Intr

oduction

The parking distance warning system assists

the driver when parking. If the rear of the v

hicle is approaching an obstacle, an intermit-

tent audible warning is emitted. The shorter

the distance, the shorter the intervals be-

tween tones. If the vehicle is too close to the

obstacle, the audible warning becomes con-

stant.

If you continue to approach an obstacle

when the sound is continuous, this means the

system can no longer measure the distance.

Sensors situated on the rear bumper transmit

and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound

signal (transmission, reflection from the ob-

stacles and reception), this system continu-

ously calculates the distance between the

bumper and the obstacle.

WARNING

The parking distance warning system can-

not replace the driv

er's assessment of the

situation.

●

The sensors have blind spots in which ob-

stacles and people are not registered.

172

Driver assistance systems

●

Always observ

e the area around the vehi-

cle, as the sensors do not always detect

small children, animals or objects.

●

The surface of certain objects and some

clothing do not reflect the ultrasound sig-

nals from the parking distance system. The

system cannot detect or incorrectly de-

tects these objects and people wearing

these types of clothes.

●

External sound sources can affect the

parking distance aid signals. In this case,

under certain circumstances, people and

objects will not be detected.

CAUTION

●

The sensors may not always be abl

e to

detect objects such as trailer draw bars,

thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open

boots, etc. This could result in damage to

your car.

●

Although the parking distance warning

system detects and warns of the presence

of an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-

pear from the angle of measurement of the

sensors if it is too high or low and the sys-

tem would no longer show it. Therefore, it

will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring

the warnings of the parking sensor system

could cause considerable damage to the

vehicle.

●

The bumper sensors may become dam-

aged or misaligned, for example, when

parking.

●

To ensure that the syst

em works properly,

the bumper sensors must be kept clean,

free of ice and snow and uncovered.

●

When cleaning the sensors with high-

pressure or steam cleaning equipment,

spray the sensors briefly at a distance of

no less than 10 cm.

●

Different sources of noise can produce

errors in the parking distance warning sys-

tem, e.g. parking distance warning systems

from other vehicles, inductive loops or con-

struction works machines.

●

Retrofitting of components to the vehicle,

such as a bicycle carrier, may interfere with

the function of the parking distance warn-

ing system.

Parking distance warning system

Fig. 167 Parking distance warning system sen-

sors on the r

ear bumper

The sensors of the parking distance warning

syst

em ar

e sit

uated on the rear bumper

›››

Fig. 167.

Switching the parking distance warning

system on and off

●

Switch on: With the ignition switched on, se-

lect reverse gear. A short audible warning

confirms that the parking distance warning

system is switched on and functioning.

●

Switch off: Release reverse gear.

Special features of the parking distance

warning system

●

The parking distance warning system

sometimes registers water on the sensors as

an obstacle.

●

If the distance does not change, the warn-

ing signal will sound less loudly after a few

seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the

volume will remain constant.

●

When the vehicle moves away from the ob-

stacle, the beeping sound automatically

switches off. When getting close again, it re-

connects.

●

Your SEAT dealership can adjust the volume

of the warning signals.

Note

A fault in the parking distance warning sys-

tem is indicated thr

ough a brief audible

warning that is constant for about 3

173

Driving

seconds when switching it on the first time.

Check the parking distance warning sys-

em at a Specialised workshop as soon as

possible.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 168 On-screen OPS display

An obstacle was detected in the collision

An obst

acl

e was detected in the segment

Zone behind the vehicle registered

The optical parking system is an extension of

the parking distance warning system

›››

page 173.

The radio screen displays the area behind

the vehicle recorded by the sensors. Any ob-

stacles are displayed in relation to the vehicle

›››

Function Necessary operations

Switching the

display on:

Switching on the

›››

page 173

parking distance warning system.

The OPS switches on automati-

cally.

Switching the

display off

manually:

Rel

ease reverse gear.

Zones explored

Behind the vehicle

›

››

Fig. 168

, the zone

analysed reaches a distance of up t

o 150 cm

and around 60 cm to the sides.

Screen display

The image displayed represents the super-

vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-

cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches

the displayed vehicle segment

. Ulti-

mat

ely, when the second-t

o-l

ast segment is

shown, the collision area has been reached.

Stop the vehicle!

Distance

from the vehi-

e to the ob-

stacle

Audible

warn-

ing

Colour of the

segment if an

obstacle is rec-

ognised

behind:

approx.

31-150

beeping

sound

Yellow

Distance

from the vehi-

e to the ob-

stacle

Audible

warn-

ing

Colour of the

segment if an

obstacle is rec-

ognised

behind:

approx.

0-30 cm

perma-

nent

sound

Red

Displayed in colour on the screen.

WARNING

Do not be distracted from traffic to look at

the screen.

Note

●

SEAT recommends practising using the

parking dist

ance warning system in a traf-

fic-free zone or in a car park to familiarise

yourself with the system and its operation.

●

The display on the radio screen of the

area explored by the sensors may take up

to 5 seconds.

City safety assist (Safety As-

sist)*

Intr

oduction

The City Safety Assist function covers driving

sit

uations at a dist

ance of about 10 metr

es in

174

Driver assistance systems

front of the vehicle, in a speed range of ap-

ximat

ely 5-30 km/h (3-19 mph).

When the system detects a possible collision

with a vehicle in front, the vehicle prepares for

a possible emergency braking

›››

If the driv

er does not r

eact t

o an imminent

collision, the system can automatically brake

the vehicle in order to reduce speed faced

with a possible collision. The system can help

to reduce the consequences of an accident.

If the City Safety Assist function determines

that the driver has braked insufficiently when

faced with an imminent collision, the system

can increase the brake force in order to re-

duce speed. The system can help to reduce

the consequences of an accident.

WARNING

The smart technology in the City Safety As-

sist system cannot change the limits im-

posed by the laws of physics and by the

syst

em itself. The increased convenience

offered by the City Safety Assist system

should never prompt you to take risks. The

driver always assumes the responsibility of

braking in time.

●

The City Safety Assist function cannot

prevent accidents or serious injury by itself.

●

The City Safety Assist system may carry

out unwanted brake interventions in com-

plex driving situations e.g. when a vehicle

crosses at a short distance.

WARNING

Relying on the City Safety Assist system in

city driving as part of one's driving behav-

iour may cause accidents and serious in-

jury. The syst

em is not a replacement for

driver awareness.

●

Always adapt your speed and the dis-

tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-

bility, weather conditions, the condition of

the road and the traffic situation.

●

The City Safety Assist function does not

react to people, animals or vehicles that

cross or move in the opposite direction in

the same lane.

●

If after switching on the City Safety Assist

function the vehicle begins to move, slow

the vehicle with the foot brake.

CAUTION

If you suspect that the City Safety Assist la-

ser sensor is damaged, switch it off

. This

will avoid additional damage.

●

Any reparation of the laser sensor re-

quires specialist knowledge. SEAT recom-

mends taking your car in for technical serv-

ice.

Note

●

If the City Safet

y Assist function activates

a brake, the brake pedal range is reduced.

This makes the brake pedal seem “harder”.

●

Automatic brak

e intervention by the City

Safety Assist function can be cancelled by

pressing the clutch pedal, the accelerator

pedal or by a corrective intervention.

●

During automatic braking by the City

Safety Assist function you may hear unusu-

al noises. This is normal and is produced in

the brake system.

Warning and control lamp

The City Safety Assist function is switched on

ery time the ignition is s

witched on. No spe-

cial indication is produced.

If the City Safety Assist function is switched

off or on, or if there is an error in the system, it

will be shown by a control lamp on the instru-

ment panel display.

 

It lights up

The city safety assist function has been switched on

with the   button

››

›

Fig. 171.

The control lamp automatically switches off after 5

seconds.



Flashes

Fast: the City Safety Assist system function brakes

automatically or has br

aked automatically.

The control lamp switches off automatically.

175

Driving



Flashes

Slow: City Safety Assist function currently not availa-

ble

If the vehicle stops, turn the engine off and on again.

If necessary, inspect the laser sensor (dirt, frost)

›››

in Laser sensor on page 176. If it still does not

function, refer to a Specialised workshop to have the

system inspected.

 

Flashes

Within the 5-30 km/h (3-19 mph) operating range:

the city safet

y assist has been switched off with the

  button

›››

Fig. 171.

Switch the city safety assist function on with button

 

›››

Fig. 171.

Several warning and control lamps should

light up f

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is

switched on, signalling that the function is be-

ing verified. They will switch off after a few

seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-

cle may stall in tr

affic, or may cause acci-

dents and severe injuries.

●

Never ignore the warning lamps.

●

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-

ble.

CAUTION

Failure to heed the warning lamps when

they appear may result in faults in the v

ehi-

cle.

Laser sensor

Fig. 169 On the windscreen: laser sensor for

the Cit

y Saf

y Assist function.

Fig. 170 Laser sensor detection area.

A laser sensor on the windscreen

›

Fig. 169

allows the system to detect driving situations

in front of the vehicle.

Vehicles ahead can be detected up to a dis-

tance of about 10 m.

WARNING

The laser beam on the sensor can produce

serious injuries to the eyes.

●

Nev

er focus optical devices, e.g. a cam-

era, a microscope or a magnifying glass

closer than 100 mm from the laser sensor.

●

Note that the laser beam can stay active

when the City Safety Assist system is

switched off or unavailable. The laser

beam is not visible to the human eye.

CAUTION

If the windscreen is dirty or frosted in the

area of the laser sensor

, e.g. due to rain,

mist or snow, the City Safety Assist system

may fail to operate as a result.

●

Always keep the laser sensor area free of

dirt and ice.

●

Use a small brush to remove snow and a

de-icer spray to remove ice.

CAUTION

A damaged windscreen in the laser sensor

area may cause the City Saf

ety Assist

function to stop working.

176

Driver assistance systems

●

Replace the windscr

een if it is scratched,

cracked or chipped by stones in the laser

sensor area. Only use a windscreen author-

ised by SEAT. Carrying out repairs is not

permitted (e.g. in the case of damage suf-

fered in an impact from a stone).

●

When replacing the windscreen wipers,

only use windscreen wipers authorised by

SEAT.

●

Do not paint the laser sensor area on the

windscreen or cover it with adhesives or

other materials.

Function

Fig. 171

In the lower part of the centre console:

butt

on f

or the cit

y safety assist function.

Switching on and off the City Safety Assist

function

●

Press the

›

Fig. 171 button on the centre

console.

When the City Safety Assist function is

switched on, the control lamp   lights up

on the dash panel within the operational

range, i.e. for speeds between 5-30 km/h

(3-19 mph).

Switch off the City Safety Assist function in

the following situations

Switching off the City Safety Assist function is

recommended in the following situations

›››

●

While the vehicle is being towed.

●

If the vehicle has been taken to an auto-

matic car w

ash.

●

If the v

ehicl

e is above a test bed.

●

If the laser sensor is faulty.

●

After the laser sensor has been involved in a

collision.

●

When driving off road (overhanging

branches).

●

If objects are protruding above the bonnet,

e.g. a load carried on the roof that significant-

ly protrudes over the front.

●

If the windscreen is damaged in the laser

sensor area.

WARNING

Failure to switch off the City Safety Assist

function in the above sit

uations may result

in accidents and serious injury.

●

Switch off the Cit

y Safety Assist function

in critical situations.

177

Driving

Special driving situations

Fig. 172

A: Vehicle on a bend. B: Motorcyclist

driving ahead out of r

ange of the l

aser sensor

Fig. 173 Other vehicles changing lanes

The City Safety Assist function is limited by

the l

aws of physics and by the nat

e of the

system itself. For this reason, this may pro-

duce reactions from the City Safety Assist

system in certain circumstances that are late

or unexpected by the driver. For this reason,

always pay due attention and if necessary,

intervene.

For example, the following driving situa-

tions require special attention:

Driving through a bend

When entering or leaving a “long” bend, the

vehicle may decelerate when the laser sen-

sor detects a vehicle travelling in the opposite

lane

›››

Fig. 172 A. To interrupt the decelera-

tion, you can step on the gas pedal, turn the

steering wheel or operate the clutch.

Narrow vehicles in front

The laser sensor will only detect narrow vehi-

cles in front if they are in the sensor's detec-

tion zone

›››

Fig. 172 B. This applies particu-

larly to narrow vehicles such as motorcycles.

Other vehicles changing lanes

Vehicles moving into your lane in close prox-

imity can cause unexpected braking from the

City Safety Assist system

›››

Fig. 173. To inter-

rupt deceleration you can accelerate, turn

the steering wheel or press the clutch.

Possible malfunction in the laser sensor

If laser sensor operation is impaired, for ex-

ample due to heavy rain, mist, snow or dirt,

the City Safety Assist system function is tem-

porarily switched off. On the instrument panel

display the control lamp  flashes.

When the fault in the laser sensor has been

rectified, the City Safety Assist system func-

tion automatically becomes available again.

The control lamp  switches off.

The following conditions could prevent the

City Safety Assist system from functioning:

●

Tight bends.

●

Accelerator pressed all the way down to

the floor.

●

If the City Safety Assist system is switched

off or there is a fault

›››

page 175.

●

If the laser sensor is dirty, covered or over-

heated

›››

page 176.

●

In the event of snow, heavy rain or dense

fog.

●

If there are vehicles in front.

●

Vehicles changing lanes.

●

Vehicles moving in the opposite direction in

the same lane.

●

Very dirty vehicles with a low degree of re-

flection.

●

Presence of thick dust.

178

Towing bracket device

Hill driving assistant*

Oper

ation

This function is only included in vehicles with

ESC.

The hill driving assistant helps the driver t

move off and upward on a hill when the vehi-

cle is stationary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-

proximately two seconds after the driver

takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent

the vehicle from lurching backward when it is

started. During these 2 seconds, the driver

has enough time to release the clutch pedal

and accelerate without the vehicle moving

and without having to use the handbrake,

making start-up easier, more comfortable

and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

●

being on a ramp or hill/slope,

●

doors closed,

●

vehicle completely stationary,

●

engine running and foot on the brake,

●

besides having a gear engaged or being in

neutral for manual gear change and with the

sel

ector lever at positions S, D or R in vehicles

with an automatic gearbox.

This system is also active when reversing up-

hill.

WARNING

●

If you do not start the v

ehicle immediate-

ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,

the vehicle may start to roll back under

certain conditions. Depress the brake ped-

al or use the hand brake immediately.

●

If the engine stalls, depress the brake

pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

●

When following a line of traffic uphill, if

you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling

back accidentally when starting off, hold

the brake pedal down for a few seconds

before starting off.

Note

The Official Service or a specialist work-

shop can tell you if your vehicl

e is equip-

ped with this system.

Towing bracket device

Driving with a tr

ail

Inf

ormation on driving with a trailer

The vehicle is not certified for trail

er coupling.

The vehicle is not factory-equipped with a

towing bracket, nor is it possible to retrofit it.

WARNING

Installing a towing bracket on the vehicle

may cause accidents and serious injuries

while operating the v

ehicle.

●

Never install a towing bracket on the ve-

hicle.

●

The trailer may be released from the ve-

hicle when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTION

Any type of towing bracket installed on the

vehicle can cause serious and costly dam-

age that ar

e not covered under the SEAT

guarantee.

179

Practical tips

Car

e and maint

enance

Accessories, r

eplacement of

parts and modifications

Introduction

WARNING

The use of spare parts and accessories, or

incorrectly performed modifications or r

pairs may result in damage to the vehicle,

accidents and serious injury.

●

SEAT strongly recommends you to only

use SEAT approved accessories and SEAT

original spare parts. These parts and ac-

cessories have been specially tested by

SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety.

●

Have any repairs or modifications carried

out at a specialised workshop. These work-

shops have the necessary tools, diagnos-

tics equipment, repair information and

qualified personnel.

●

Only mount parts with the same specifi-

cations as the parts fitted at factory.

●

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as

drink holders or telephone cradles over the

covers of the airbag modules or within their

deployment zones.

●

Only use wheels and tyr

e combinations

which have been approved by SEAT for

your vehicle type.

Accessories and spare parts

SEAT recommends you consult an Official

Service before pur

chasing accessories and

spare parts or consumables. For example,

when fitting accessories at a later date, or

when replacing a component. A SEAT Official

Service will advise you as to the legal require-

ments and manufacturer's recommendations

regarding accessories, spare parts and other

components.

SEAT recommend you use only approved

SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare

parts

. These parts and accessories have

been specially tested by SEAT for suitability,

reliability and safety. In addition, SEAT techni-

cal services will guarantee that assembly is

performed professionally.

Although we continually monitor the market,

SEAT cannot guarantee that products not

approved by SEAT are reliable, safe or suita-

ble for the vehicle. Therefore, SEAT cannot

accept liability, even in those cases author-

ised by an officially recognised technical in-

spection office or other official body.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-

rect effect on vehicle control must be ap-

proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and

bear the e mark (the European Union's au-

thorisation symbol). This includes cruise con-

trol syst

ems or electronically controlled sus-

pension.

If any additional electrical devices are fit-

ted which do not serve to control the vehicle

itself, these must bear the  mark (European

Union manufacturer conformity declaration).

This includes refrigerator boxes, laptops or

ventilator fans.

WARNING

Unprofessional repairs or modifications to

the vehicle may aff

ect the performance of

the airbags, and may cause operating

faults or fatal accidents.

●

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as

drink holders or telephone cradles over or

next to the covers of the airbag modules or

within their deployment zones.

●

Objects placed over the airbag covers, or

within their deployment zones, could lead

to serious injury or loss of life if the airbags

are triggered.

Service fluids and components

All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as

not

ched belts, t

es, coolant fluids, engine

oils, spark plugs and batteries are continually

being developed. Therefore all fluids and

180

Care and maintenance

consumables should be changed at a speci-

alised w

orkshop

. T

echnical services are per-

manently informed of any modifications.

WARNING

The incorrect use or handling of fluids or

consumables may result in accident, seri-

ous injury, burns or int

oxication.

●

Therefore, fluids must always be stored

closed in their original container.

●

Never store fluids in empty food contain-

ers or bottles as other people may acci-

dentally drink the fluid.

●

Keep all fluids and consumables out of

reach of children.

●

Read and observe the information and

warnings given on the fluid containers.

●

Only work in the open air or in well-venti-

lated zones, when using products which

give off harmful vapours.

●

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil,

acetone or any other volatile liquid in the

maintenance of the vehicle. These are toxic

and highly flammable. They could lead to

fire or explosions!

CAUTION

●

Only use appropriate fluids. Do not con-

fuse fluids as this can cause serious mal

functions or engine damage.

●

Accessories and other components

mounted in front of the air inlet reduce the

cooling effect of the coolant. If the engine

is running under great strain in high outside

emperatures, it could overheat.

For the sake of the environment

Leaking fluids could pollute the environ-

ment. Coll

ect any spilt fluids in suitabl

containers and dispose of them in accord-

ance with legislation and with respect for

the environment.

Repairs and technical changes

When performing repairs and technical

modifications, SEAT's dir

ectiv

es must be

observ

ed!

›››

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic

components or softw

e in the v

ehicle may

cause malfunctions. Due to the way the elec-

tronic components are linked together in net-

works, other indirect systems may be affec-

ted by the faults. This may significantly affect

the vehicle's performance, increase compo-

nent wear and could mean that the vehicle

registration documents are no longer valid.

Your SEAT Official Service cannot be held lia-

ble for any damage caused by technical

modifications or repairs performed incorrect-

ly.

The SEAT Official Service does not accept li-

ability for damage resulting from technical

modifications or repairs performed incorrect-

ly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these

cases.

SEAT recommends you have any technical

modifications or repairs performed at a SEAT

Official Service and that you use genuine

SEAT spare parts

Vehicles with special accessories and

equipment

The manufacturers of additional equipment

guarantee that the equipment complies with

applicable laws and regulations with respect

to the environment, in particular Directives

2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first di-

rective governs the disposal of end-of-life ve-

hicles while the second refers to the restric-

tions on the marketing and use of certain

dangerous substances and preparations.

The vehicle owner should keep the documen-

tation for the additional equipment safely

and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end

of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that

any additional equipment mounted in end-of-

life vehicles is correctly disposed of with re-

spect for the environment.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the driver assistance

181

Practical tips

systems. This could result in serious acci-

dent.

●

All repairs and modifications to the vehi-

cle should only be perf

ormed by a special-

ised workshop.

Repairs and malfunctions in the

airbag system

When performing repairs and technical

modifications, SEAT's directives must be

observ

ed!

›››

Modifications and repairs to the front bumper,

doors, fr

ont seats, and r

epairs t

o the roof or

chassis should only be carried out in a speci-

alised workshop. These components may

contain parts or sensors belonging to the air-

bag system.

If work is carried out on the airbag system or

parts have to be removed and fitted on the

system when performing other repair work,

parts of the airbag system may be damaged.

The consequence may be that, in the event

of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly

or does not inflate at all.

So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not

reduced and that removed parts do not

cause any injuries or environmental pollution,

regulations must be observed. These require-

ments are known to specialised workshops.

Modifications to the vehicle suspension may

affect the operation of the airbag system in

the event of collision. For example, if wheel

and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT

are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered,

the suspension is stiffened or the suspension

springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are

modified, the results received by the airbag

sensors and sent to the control unit may not

be accurate. For example, some modifica-

tions to the suspension could increase the

force measured by the sensors and result in

the triggering of the airbag systems in colli-

sions. Under normal conditions, the measured

values would be lower and the airbag would

not have been triggered. Other modifications

may reduce the forces measured by the sen-

sors and prevent the airbags from being trig-

gered when they should.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the airbag systems.

This could result in serious or fatal acci-

dents.

●

All repairs and modifications to the vehi-

cle should only be performed by a special-

ised workshop.

●

Airbag modules must never be repaired:

they have to be replaced.

●

Never fit r

ecycled or reused airbag com-

ponents in your vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension, in-

cluding the use of unauthorised wheel and

yre combinations, may aff

ect the perform-

ance of the airbags and increase the risk of

serious or fatal injury in the event of acci-

dent.

●

Never fit suspension components which

are not identical to the original parts in the

vehicle.

●

Never use wheel and tyre combinations

not approved by SEAT.

Retrofitting of mobile phones

An exterior aerial is required for the use of

o-w

ay r

adios in the vehicle.

The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic ap-

pliances in the vehicle is subject to their ap-

proval for use in your vehicle. Under certain

circumstances, this could mean that your ve-

hicle registration documents are no longer

valid.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with

two-way radios providing the following con-

ditions are observed:

182

Care and maintenance

●

The e

erior aerial must be mount

ed pro-

fessionally.

●

The maximum transmitting power is 10

watts.

The optimal reach of the equipment is only

achieved with an external aerial.

Check first with a specialised workshop that

understands the technical possibilities of in-

stallation if you wish to use a two-way radio

with a transmitting power of over 10 watts.

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service.

All legal requirements, together with the in-

structions for the use of two-way radios must

be observed.

WARNING

If the two-way radio is not securely fas-

tened in position, it could be sent flying

ound the vehicle in the event of sharp

braking, sudden manoeuvres or accident,

causing injury.

●

While driving, two-way radios must be

securely fastened in position, outside the

airbags deployment zones, or safely stow-

ed away.

WARNING

When using a two-way radio without a con-

nection to an ext

erior aerial, the maximum

permitted levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion may be exceeded. This is also the case

if the aerial has not been correctly instal

led.

●

You should only use a two-way radio in-

side the vehicle if it has first been correctly

connected to an exterior aerial.

Using a mobile telephone in a vehi-

cle without connection to an e

xteri-

or aerial

Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio

es al

so called high-frequency energy,

both when in use and when on stand-by. Sci-

entific studies state that radio waves exceed-

ing certain values may be harmful to the hu-

man body. International committees and au-

thorities have established limits and direc-

tives in order to ensure electromagnetic radi-

ation from mobile phones remains within cer-

tain limits that do not endanger health. Nev-

ertheless, there is no conclusive scientific evi-

dence that wireless telephones are totally

safe.

That is why some experts recommend mod-

erate use of the mobile telephone, and the

appliance of measures to reduce radiation on

the human body.

When a mobile phone not connected to an

exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the

electromagnetic radiation may be greater

than if the mobile phone were connected to a

built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-

free device that allows the employment of

numerous additional mobile telephone func-

tions with compatible Bluetooth technology

it will comply with the legislation in many

countries which only permits the use of mo-

bile phones inside vehicles using a hands-

free device.

Mobile telephones must be placed in a suita-

ble telephone support or stored safely in the

vehicle. If a support is used for the telephone,

it must be securely fastened to the base

plate. The mobile will be secure on the instru-

ment panel and always within reach of the

driver only by following these procedures.

Mobile telephone connection with an exter-

nal aerial is carried out subject to the hands-

free device, via the telephone support or by

the Bluetooth

connections present in the

mobile telephone and the vehicle.

If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial

incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior

aerial connected to the vehicle, it will help re-

duce the electromagnetic radiation transmit-

ted and the risk to human health. It will also

improve the quality of the connection.

If the phone is used inside the vehicle without

the hands-free system, it will not be securely

fastened and will not be connected to the ex-

terior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will

183

Practical tips

the telephone charge if it is not on the sup-

port. In addition, some call

s may br

eak off

and the qualit

y of the connection will be af-

fected.

Mobile telephones should only be used inside

the vehicle if they are connected to a hands-

free system. SEAT recommends using an ex-

ternal aerial should you wish to use a mobile

telephone inside the vehicle.

Bluetooth

is a registered trademark of Blue-

tooth

SIG, Inc.

WARNING

If the mobile phone is not securely fastened

in position, it could be sent flying around

the v

ehicle in the event of sharp braking,

sudden manoeuvres or accident, causing

injury.

●

While driving, the mobile telephone, oth-

er equipment including telephone acces-

sories such as telephone supports, note-

pads and navigators must be correctly se-

cured, away from the airbags deployment

zones, or stored in a safe place.

WARNING

When using a mobile telephone or two-way

radio without connecting an ext

ernal aer-

ial, the maximum permitted levels of elec-

tromagnetic radiation in the vehicle may be

exceeded, thus putting the driver and the

rest of the vehicle occupants in danger.

This is also the case if the aerial has not

been correctly install

ed.

●

A minimum of 20 centimetres should be

kept between mobile phone aerials and ar-

tificial pacemakers, as mobile telephones

may affect the working of pacemakers.

●

Do not keep mobile phones in breast

pockets directly above pacemakers.

●

Immediately switch off the mobile tele-

phone if you suspect any interference with

pacemakers or other types of medical

equipment.

Support points for raising the vehi-

Fig. 174

Front jacking points for raising vehicle

with lifting pl

atf

orm or jack

Fig. 175 Rear jacking points for raising vehicle

with lifting platform or jack

Always use the jacking points indicated in the

figur

›

Fig. 174 and

›››

Fig. 175 when rais-

ing the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at

these points, it could be seriously damaged

›››

or lead to serious injury

›

The v

ehicl

e shoul

d not be lifted using lifting

platforms with lift pads containing fluid.

When raising a vehicle using a platform or

jack, a series of precautionary measures are

required. Do not raise the vehicle with a lifting

platform or jack unless you have received

training in how to do so and know how to do

so safely.

Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack

›››

page 72.

184

Care and maintenance

WARNING

The improper use of the lifting platform or

the jack when raising the vehicl

e may result

in accidents or serious injury.

●

Before raising the vehicle, please observe

the manufacturer's instructions for the

platform or jack, and the legal require-

ments, where applicable.

●

There should not be anyone inside the

vehicle when it is being raised or once it is

in the air.

●

Only use the jacking points indicated in

the figures

›››

Fig. 174 and

›››

Fig. 175 when

raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted

at the indicated points, it may fall from the

platform while the engine or gearbox is be-

ing dismounted, for example.

●

The jacking points should be centrally

aligned and firmly positioned on the plat-

form support plates.

●

Never start the engine when the vehicle is

raised! The vehicle may fall from the plat-

form due to the engine vibrations.

●

If it is necessary to work underneath the

vehicle while it is raised, you should check

that the supporting stands have an ade-

quate load capacity.

●

Never climb onto the lifting platform.

●

Always make sure that the weight of the

vehicle does not exceed the lifting platform

load capacity.

CAUTION

●

Never r

aise the vehicle at the engine oil

sump, the gearbox or the rear or front

axles.

●

Always use an intermediate rubber sup-

port to prevent damage to the vehicle un-

derbody. Check that the arms of the lifting

platform are able to move with obstruction.

●

The arms should not come into contact

with the side running boards or other parts

of the vehicle.

185

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev-

Fuel

Identification of the fuel

Fig. 176 Identification of fuels according to Eu-

opean Union (EU) Dir

ectiv

e 2014/94/

Fuels are identified with different symbols.

Depending on the fuel, the diff

ent symbol

are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-

cle. The identification serves to prevent con-

fusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-

nol). The number indicates the percent-

age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,

or e

ample, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.

Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-

diesel). The number indicates the per-

centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

means, for example, a proportion of bio-

diesel of max. 7%.

Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed

Natural Gas.

Type of petrol

3 Applies to vehicl

es: with petrol engine

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the

fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-

verter and must only be run on unleaded

petrol. The petrol must comply with the

standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels

with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled

(E10)

. The types of petrol are differentiated

by using the octane numbers (RON) or via

the anti-knock index (AKI).

The following pieces of text show the infor-

mation included in the corresponding stickers

on the tank lid (examples):

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or

normal 91 oct

ane petr

ol at l

east

We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-

tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91

octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at

least

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91

AKI) at least.

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or

super 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98

octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super

95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power

loss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-

mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only

use moderate engine speeds and a light

Depending on country

Follow the regulations of the country you are

driving in.

186

Checking and refilling levels

throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-

CAUTION

●

Fuels high percent

age of ethanol, e.g.

E30 - E100 button must not be used. The

fuel system would be damaged. Exception:

vehicles with Totalflex engine

›››

page 187,

Ethanol fuel.

●

A single refuelling with leaded fuel or

other metal additives entails a permanent

deterioration of the effectiveness of the

catalytic converter.

●

Only use fuel additives that have been

approved by SEAT. The products that con-

tain substances to increase the octane rat-

ing or decrease knocking may contain met-

al additives that damage the engine and

catalytic converter. This type of products

must not be used.

●

Do not use fuels shown in the pump as

containing metals. LRP (lead replacement

petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of

metal additives. Risk of engine damage!

●

High engine speed and full throttle can

damage the engine when using petrol with

an octane rating lower than the correct

grade for the engine.

Note

●

Fuel with an octane rating higher than the

one r

equired by the engine can be used.

●

In countries in which there is no sulphur-

free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-

phur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel

3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine

You can r

ecognise vehicles with Totalflex en-

gines

by label on the fuel tank lid with with

the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with

unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-

ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high

percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-

led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that

›››

page 186, Type of pet-

rol

Note

SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-

sively with petrol e

very 10,000 km to de-

crease impurities that using E100 ethanol

fuel might have left in the engine.

Natural gas

3 Applies to vehicles: with a natural gas engine

Natur

al gas can be compressed or in liquid

form, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)

Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only

be working with CNG (Compressed Natural

Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethane

if it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Do not use fuels such as liquefied natural gas

(Liquefied Natural Gas), liquified petroleum

gas (LPG = Liquefied Petroleum G) or hy-

thane (hydrogen mixed with methane)

›››

Ther

e, vehicles with a natural gas engine

must only be refuelled using compressed

natural gas (CNG).

Natural gas quality and consumption

Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L

depending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power and

inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content

than type L. The higher the heating power of

the natural gas, the lower the consumption

will be.

This motor is only available in some markets.

187

Practical tips

However, the heating power and the propor-

tion of nitr

ogen and carbon dio

xide can fluc-

uate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve-

hicle consumption can also vary when using

a single type of gas only.

The engine management automatically

adapts to the natural gas used according to

its quality. Therefore, different quality gases

can be mixed in the tank, without the need for

comprehensive draining before applying a

different quality gas.

Natural gas and safety

If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a

leak

›››

●

Stop the vehicle immediately.

●

Switch the ignition off.

●

Open the doors to appropriately ventilate

the v

ehicl

●

Extinguish cigarettes immediately.

●

Move away from the vehicle or switch off

objects that may cause sparks or a fire.

●

If you continue to smell gas, do not contin-

ue driving!

●

Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault

repaired.

Regular checks of the natural gas system

The natural gas tanks may be damaged or

corroded by external factors. The walls of the

gas tanks are weakened by deformations,

damage or corrosion. As a result, the tanks

could burst and result in serious injuries or

even death. For this reason, the vehicle owner

must have a specialised workshop check (vis-

ual check) the gas system every 4 years at

least. The vehicle owner must have a speci-

alised workshop replace the natural gas

tanks before they reach the end of their serv-

ice life. For further information about the serv-

ice life of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer serv-

ice or a specialised workshop

WARNING

Failure to act when you can smell gas in the

vehicle or when r

efuelling can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Carry out the necessary operations.

●

Leave the danger zone.

●

If necessary, warn the emergency serv-

ices.

WARNING

The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-

ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),

so LNG or LPG shoul

d not be used under

any circumstances. Liquid gas can cause

an explosion of the natural gas tanks and

cause severe injuries!

WARNING

Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-

sult in serious injury or even death.

●

Hav

e the natural gas deposits checked at

least every 4 years (visual check).

●

Natural gas tanks have a limited service

life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced

when required. You can obtain further infor-

mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-

alised workshops.

WARNING

If the vehicle underbody touches the

ground or in the ev

ent of a rear collision,

there could be damage to the natural gas

tanks.

●

Check whether there is a smell of gas.

●

If you notice a smell of gas, take the vehi-

cle to a specialised workshop immediately

and have the natural gas system checked.

Note

Have the natural gas system checked regu-

larly by a specialised workshop

, according

to the Maintenance Programme.

188

Checking and refilling levels

Filling the tank

Intr

oduction

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the

vehicle

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can

cause an explosion or fir

e resulting in seri-

ous burns and injuries.

●

Always make sure that you correctly

close the fuel cap to avoid evaporation and

fuel spillage.

●

Fuels are highly explosive and inflamma-

ble substances that can cause serious

burns and injuries.

●

Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the en-

gine is not switched off or if the filler fuel

nozzle is not fully inserted into the tank fill-

er neck when refuelling. This could lead to

a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

●

When refuelling, turn off the engine and

turn off the ignition for safety reasons.

●

Always turn off mobile telephones, radio

apparatus and other radio wave emitting

equipment before refuelling. Electromag-

netic waves could cause sparks and lead

to a fire.

●

Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If

it is absolutely necessary to enter, close

the door and touch a metal surface before

touching the filler nozzle again. This will

prevent the generation of static electricity.

Sparks could cause a fire when r

efuelling.

●

Never handle fuel close to flames, sparks

or objects with slow combustion (e.g. ciga-

rettes).

●

Avoid static electricity and electro-mag-

netic radiation when refuelling.

●

Observe the safety regulations of the

service station.

●

Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the

luggage compartment.

WARNING

For safety reasons, SEAT does not recom-

mend carrying a spare fuel canister in the

ehicle. Fuel could be spilled and catch

fire, above all in case of an accident and

this applies to a full container as well as

empty containers. This could lead to explo-

sions, fires and injuries.

●

Observe the following if you exceptional-

ly have to carry fuel in a canister:

–

Never place a fuel container, to fill it, in-

side the vehicle or on the vehicle, for

example, in the luggage compartment.

Filling in these circumstances could

create an electrostatic charge and

spark that could ignite fuel fumes.

–

Always place the canister on the

ground to fill it.

–

Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of

the canister as far as possible.

–

If you are using a metal fuel canist

er,

the nozzle must always touch the can-

ister while it is being filled to avoid stat-

ic electricity.

–

Follow the legal requirements for the

use, storage and transport of spare fuel

canisters.

–

Insure that the fuel container complies

with manufacturing standards, for ex-

ample, ANSI or ASTM F852-86.

CAUTION

●

ways r

emove any fuel spilled anywhere

on the vehicle to avoid damage to the

wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paint-

work.

●

Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel can

cause serious engine and fuel system dam-

age; the resulting malfunctions are not

covered by the SEAT warranty. If you refuel

with the wrong type of fuel, never start the

engine. This applies to even the smallest

amount of the wrong fuel. Seek specialist

assistance. With the engine running, the

composition of the wrong fuel could signifi-

cantly damage the fuel system and the en-

gine itself.

For the sake of the environment

Fuels can contaminate the environment.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allo

w a

professional to dispose of them.

189

Practical tips

Control lamps and fuel gauge

Fig. 177

On the instrument panel: Fuel gauge

or petr

Fig. 178 On the instrument panel: Fuel gauge

or petr

The fuel gauge can vary depending on the

ehicl

e equipment

›

››

Fig. 177 or

›››

Fig. 178.



It lights up

The fuel tank is almost empty. The reserve tank is be-

ing used (red mark

››

›

Fig. 177)

›››

page 32.

Refuel as soon as possible

›››

This only applies to vehicles with the fuel gauge on

the dash panel

›››

Fig. 177.



It lights up

The natural gas tank is almost empty. The reserve

tank is being used (red mark

›

››

Fig. 178)

›››

page 32.

Refuel as soon as possible

›››

This only applies to vehicles with the fuel gauge on

the dash panel

›

Fig. 177.



and the seg-

ments r

emain-

ing

ashes f

or about 10 sec-

onds

The fuel tank is almost empty. The reserve tank is be-

ing used

›

››

page 32.

Refuel as soon as possible

›››

This only applies to vehicles with the fuel gauge on

the dash panel displ

ay.

eral warning and control lamps light up

for a few seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

In natural gas engines

During driving, the fuel gauge needle is in the

fuel area with which the car is currently driv-

ing. Whenever the ignition is switched on, the

needle changes first for a few seconds to the

petrol area in order to display the current lev-

el of fuel. The needle then moves to the natu-

ral gas area. After the engine is started, the

needle changes to the area corresponding to

the current operating mode.

Remark: if the vehicle is left parked for a long

time just after refuelling, the gas level indica-

tor does not accurately indicate the same

level shown after refuelling when the vehicle

is started up again. This is not due to a leak in

the system, but to a drop in pressure in the

gas tank for technical reasons after a cooling

phase immediately after refuelling.

WARNING

Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could

result in the vehicl

e breaking down in traffic

and a serious accident.

●

If the fuel level is too low then the fuel

supply to the engine can become irregular

especially on slopes.

●

If the engine “is choked” or stalls due to

lack of or irregularity of the fuel supply, the

power steering as well as all of the driver

assistance systems including brake assis-

tance will stop working.

190

Checking and refilling levels

●

Always r

efuel when there is only one

quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running

out of fuel.

CAUTION

●

ways pay att

ention to any lit control

lamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage to

the vehicle.

●

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

An irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition

faults and unburnt fuel could enter the ex-

haust system. This could damage the cata-

lytic converter.

Note

The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on

the instrument panel

›››

Fig. 177 indicates

the side of the vehicle on which the fuel

tank flap is located.

Refuelling with petrol

Fig. 179

Open fuel tank flap with tank cap in

the hol

der

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32

Before refuelling, always turn off the engine,

the ignition, mobile telephones, auxiliary

heating and keep them off during refuelling.

Refuelling

The correct petrol type for the vehicle is loca-

ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap

›››

page 186.

●

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated

correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the

fuel tank is full

›››

●

Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off!

Otherwise

, this will fill the e

xpansion chamber

and fuel may l

eak out if the ambient condi-

tions are warm.

Vehicles with a natural gas engine

Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-

rol until the control lamp switches off  and

then the tank must be refilled. This is neces-

sary to ensure the efficient operation of the

system and the fuel quality required for run-

ning on gas.

WARNING

Do not continue refilling once the fuel noz-

zle has swit

ched itself off. The fuel tank

may be filled too much. As a result, fuel

may spurt out and spill. This could lead to a

fire, explosion and severe injuries.

CAUTION

●

Always r

emove any fuel spilled anywhere

on the vehicle to avoid damage to the

wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paint-

work.

For the sake of the environment

Fuels can contaminate the environment.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allo

w a

professional to dispose of them.

191

Practical tips

Refuelling with natural gas

Fig. 180

Open tank lid: gas filler mouth

, fill-

er mouth r

ainer

Before r

efuelling, the engine and the ignition,

mobil

e t

elephone and heating must be

switched off separately

›››

It is al

so essential t

o car

efully read the in-

structions for the natural gas pump.

The vehicle is equipped for refuelling only

with Compressed Natural Gas (CNG)

›››

efuelling with another t

ype of nat

ural gas is

not allowed, e.g. Liquefied Natural Gas (LNG)

or hydromethane.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel

tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth.

●

Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the

central locking button  situated on the driver

door

›››

page 97.

●

Press on the rear area of the flap and open

it.

Refuelling

Remark: If the ambient temperature is very

high, the natural gas pump protection against

overheating disconnects this automatically.

●

Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth

›››

Fig. 180

●

Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas

fill

er mouth.

●

The fuel t

ank will be

full when the pump

compressor automatically cuts the supply.

●

If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,

press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

Closing the fuel tank cap

●

Check that the gas filler mouth retainer

is not trapped with the filler nozzle. If neces-

sary, pl

ace it in the fill

er mouth again.

●

Insert the plug in the fill

er mouth.

●

Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it

click into place.

WARNING

Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily

flammable subst

ance. Incorrect handling

of the natural gas can cause accidents se-

rious burns and other injuries.

●

Before refuelling with natural gas, the fill-

ing mouth must be correctly engaged. If

you can smell gas, stop refuelling immedi-

ately.

WARNING

The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied

nat

ural gas (LNG) and this fuel must not be

added under any cir

cumstances. Liquefied

natural gas can cause the natural gas tank

to explode, resulting in serious injury.

Note

●

The filling nozzles of nat

ural gas pumps

can differ in the way they are operated. If

you are unacquainted with the pump, it is

advisable that a member of staff of the

service station performs the refuelling op-

eration.

●

Noises heard when refuelling are normal

and do not indicate the presence of a fault

in the system.

●

The vehicle natural gas system is pre-

pared both for refuelling with a small com-

pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-

sor (fast refuel) in natural gas service sta-

tions.

192

Checking and refilling levels

Bonnet

orking in the engine compar

ment

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 12

Before working in the engine compartment,

make sure that the vehicle is parked on hori-

zontal and firm ground.

The engine compartment of the vehicle is a

hazardous area. Never work on the engine or

in the engine compartment if you are not fa-

miliar with the operations to be carried out,

the applicable safety standards and espe-

cially if you do not have the necessary instru-

ments, liquids and tools

›››

! If required,

hav

e any w

ork carried out by a specialised

orkshop. Negligent work can cause serious

injury.

WARNING

If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this

could cause serious injury.

●

Nev

er work under the vehicle if it has not

been immobilized. If you must work under-

neath the vehicle with the wheels in con-

tact with the ground then it should be

parked on flat ground, the wheels should

be prevented from moving and the key

should be removed from the ignition.

●

If you have to w

ork underneath the vehi-

cle, you must use suitable stands addition-

ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of

accident!. The jack is not intended for this

kind of work and its failure could lead to se-

vere injuries.

●

Disconnect the Start-Stop system.

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous

ea capable of causing serious injury.

●

or all type of work, always take the ut-

most precautions, work carefully and note

the general safety standards in force. Nev-

er take personal risks.

●

Never work on the engine or in the engine

compartment if you are not familiar with

the necessary operations. If you are not

sure about procedures then visit a special-

ised workshop to carry out the necessary

work. Working incorrectly can cause seri-

ous injuries.

●

Never open the bonnet if you see steam

or coolant escaping from the engine com-

partment. This may cause serious burns. Al-

ways wait until you cannot see or hear the

sound of steam or coolant coming from the

engine compartment.

●

Always allow the engine to cool down be-

fore opening the bonnet.

●

Contact with hot elements of the engine

and the exhaust system can cause burns.

●

Once the engine has cooled, foll

ow the

instructions below before opening the bon-

net:

–

Engage the handbrake and place the

gear selector lever in N or the gear

stick in neutral.

–

Remove the key from the ignition.

–

Keep children away from the engine

compartment and never leave them

unsupervised.

●

When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-

ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew

the cap on the expansion tank when the en-

gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray

out under pressure causing burns and seri-

ous injury.

–

After cooling, carefully and slowly un-

screw the cap anticlockwise, gently

pressing down on it.

–

Always protect your face, hands and

arms from hot coolant and steam using

a large, thick cloth.

●

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them

on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-

tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire.

WARNING

The high voltages of the electrical system

can give electric shocks as w

ell as causing

burns and serious injury and possibly even

death!

193

Practical tips

●

Never cause shor

t circuits in the electri-

cal system. The battery could explode.

●

To minimise the risk of electric shock and

serious consequences while the engine is

running or starting the engine, note the fol-

lowing:

–

Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.

WARNING

In the engine compartment, there are rotat-

ing par

ts that could cause serious injury.

●

ver place your hands directly on or

near the radiator fan. Touching the rotor

blades could seriously harm you. The venti-

lator works according to the engine tem-

perature and could start suddenly even

when the ignition is turned off and the key is

removed.

●

If any work has to be performed when the

engine is started or with the engine running,

there is an additional, potentially fatal,

safety risk from rotating parts, such as the

drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., as

well as from the high-voltage ignition sys-

tem. Always work with the utmost caution.

–

Always make sure that no parts of your

body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and

long hair can be trapped by the rotat-

ing parts of the engine. Before any

work, remove ties and jewellery (neck-

laces, etc), tie long hair back and tie all

items of loose clothing to your body to

make sure that they cannot be trapped

by engine components.

–

Take e

xtreme caution when operating

the accelerator and remain attentive.

The vehicle could move, even if the

handbrake is applied.

●

Always make sure you have not left any

objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools,

in the engine compartment. If any object is

left in the engine compartment, this could

cause malfunctions, engine faults and even

a fire.

WARNING

Refill liquids and certain materials can

catch fire easily in the engine compar

ment, causing a fire and serious injury!

●

Never smoke.

●

Never work close to places exposed to

flames or sparks.

●

Never pour service fluids over the engine.

These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and

cause injuries.

●

If it is necessary to work on the fuel sys-

tem or the electrical system, please follow

the instructions below:

–

Always disconnect the vehicle battery.

–

Never work close to heaters, heat sour-

ces or places exposed to flames or

sparks.

●

Always keep a recently serviced and per-

fectly working fire extinguisher close by.

●

Never co

ver the engine with additional in-

sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of

fire!

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it

coul

d suddenly open while driving l

eaving

the driver without visibility. This could re-

sult in a serious accident.

●

After closing the bonnet, always check

that it is properly secured by the locking

mechanism in the lock carrier piece. The

bonnet must be flush with the surrounding

body panels.

●

While driving, if you notice that the bon-

net is not correctly closed then stop imme-

diately and close it correctly.

●

Make sure the bonnet is opened and

closed safely (when the engine is off, no

smoke is coming from the engine compart-

ment, there is enough space around the

car, no people are near, etc.).

CAUTION

●

When refilling or changing service liq-

uids, ensure that you put the liquids int

o the

right tank. Making a mistake when refilling

could cause serious malfunctions and

damage the engine!

●

To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the

windscreen wiper arms, only open it when

194

Checking and refilling levels

the windscreen wipers are in place against

the windscreen.

●

Befor

e driving, always lower the wiper

arms.

For the sake of the environment

Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-

onment. For this r

eason you should make

regular checks on the ground underneath

your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a special-

ised workshop to be checked if you see

stains, oil or other fluids on the ground.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a

professional to dispose of them.

Engine oil

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause

injury and serious burns.

●

Always protect your eyes when handling

engine oil.

●

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the

reach of childr

en.

●

Engine oil should only be kept in its origi-

nal packaging; the same goes for used oil

until it is disposed of.

●

Never st

ore engine oil in empty food con-

tainers or bottles as other people may ac-

cidentally drink it.

●

Regular contact with engine oil can be

bad for the skin. If you come into contact

with engine oil, wash your skin with soap

and water.

●

With the engine running, the engine oil

gets extremely hot and can cause severe

skin burns. Always wait until the engine has

fully cooled.

For the sake of the environment

Similar to the other service liquids, spilled

engine oil can be bad for the environment.

Coll

ect these liquids in suitable containers

and dispose of them while respecting the

environment.

Control and warning lamps



Flashes

Engine oil pressure too low.

 Stop the vehicl

e! Switch off the engine. Check

the engine oil level, and if necessary, refill with en-

gine oil

›››

page 196.

- If the warning indicator flashes although the oil lev-

el is correct, do not continue driving or leave the en-

gine running. Otherwise, the engine could be dam-

aged. Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 27.

Engine oil specifications

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 32

Replacement engine oil must strictly comply

with the specifications.

The correct oil must be used to ensure the

correct operation and long service life of the

engine. The engine comes with a high-quality

multigrade oil that can generally be used all

year round.

Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT

standards whenever possible

›››

. Only refill

engine oil using appr

ed engine oil in ac-

cordance with the corresponding VW stand-

ard (

›››



page 33). All oils indicated are

synthetic multigrade oils.

Engine oils are being continuously further de-

veloped. Technical services are constantly

updated with any modifications. SEAT there-

fore recommends that you have the engine

oil changed by a technical service.

CAUTION

●

Only use engine oils whose specifica-

tions are e

xpressly approved by SEAT. The

195

Practical tips

use of any other type of oil could cause en-

gine damage!

●

No additives should be used with engine

oil. Any damage caused by the use of such

additives woul

d not be covered by the fac-

tory warranty.

Checking engine oil level and top-

ping up

Fig. 181

Marked engine oil dipstick

Fig. 182 In the engine compartment: engine oil

filler cap.

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32

Preparations

●

Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the

engine oil reading is correct.

●

The engine must be hot to be able to check

the engine oil level. Stop the engine and wait

a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the

sump.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

●

The engine oil filler neck can be recognised

by the symbol  on the cap

›››

Fig. 182 and

the dipstick by its coloured handle.

Check the engine oil level

●

Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean

cloth.

●

Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as

it will go. If the dipstick to measure engine oil

has a mark, when you reintroduce it this mark

should slot into the corresponding groove lo-

cated on the upper end of the tube.

●

Remove the oil dipstick again and check

the engine oil level.

●

After reading the oil level, replace the dip-

stick in the tube completely.

WARNING

Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact

with hot engine components. This could

lead t

o a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

●

Always ensure that after topping of oil,

the engine oil filler cap is correctly tight-

ened. This will avoid engine oil spilling onto

hot engine parts when the engine is run-

ning.

CAUTION

●

If the engine oil lev

el is above the area

›››

Fig. 181

do not start the engine. Re-

quest help from specialised staff

. Other-

wise catalytic converter and engine dam-

age may occur.

●

When refilling or changing service liq-

uids, ensure that you put the liquids into the

right tank. Making a mistake when refilling

could cause serious malfunctions and

damage the engine!

196

Checking and refilling levels

For the sake of the environment

The oil level must never be above zone

Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the

ankcase breather and leak into the at-

mosphere via the exhaust system.

Engine oil consumption

The consumption of engine oil can be differ-

ent from one engine to another and can v

ary

during the useful life of the engine.

Depending on how you drive and the condi-

tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-

sumption can be up to 1 ltr./2000 km. In the

case of new vehicles, the consumption can

exceed this figure over 5,000 kilometres. For

this reason the engine oil level must be

checked at regular intervals, preferably when

filling the tank and before a journey.

When the engine is working hard, for instance

during sustained high-speed motorway cruis-

ing in summer or when climbing mountain

passes, the oil level should preferably be kept

within area

›››

Fig. 181

Topping up engine oil

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 32.

The engine oil must be changed regularly ac-

cording to the specifications of the Mainte-

nance Programme.

Due to the problems linked with disposing of

used oil and the need for suitable tools and

special knowledge, always visit a specialised

workshop to have the engine oil and filter

changed. SEAT recommends taking your car

in for technical service.

Detailed information on the service intervals

is shown in the Maintenance Programme.

Engine oil additives make new oil darker after

the engine has been running for a short peri-

od. This is normal and does not mean more

frequent oil changes are required.

WARNING

Only change the engine oil yourself if you

have the specialist knowl

edge required!

●

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-

serve the warnings

›››

page 193.

●

Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil

may cause burn injuries.

●

Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,

such as acid burns, caused by splashes of

oil.

●

When removing the oil drain plug with

your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to

help prevent oil from running down your

arm.

●

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes int

contact with engine oil.

●

Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be

stored in a safe place out of the reach of

children.

CAUTION

No additives should be used with engine oil.

This coul

d result in engine damage

. Any

damage caused by the use of such addi-

tives would not be covered by the factory

warranty.

For the sake of the environment

Before changing the engine oil, find a suita-

ble location or service f

or proper disposal.

For the sake of the environment

Always dispose of engine oil with the ut-

most respect for the envir

onment. Never

dispose of used engine oil in places such as

a garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, riv-

ers and drainage systems.

197

Practical tips

Engine coolant

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Engine coolant is toxic!

●

Only keep engine coolant in its original

container, tightly shut and in a saf

e place.

●

Never store engine coolant in empty food

containers or bottles as other people may

accidentally drink it.

●

Always keep engine coolant out of reach

of children.

●

Ensure that the proportion of engine

coolant additive corresponds to the lowest

outside temperature to which the vehicle

will be exposed.

●

If the outside temperature is extremely

low, the engine coolant could freeze caus-

ing the vehicle to stop. As this would also

cause the heating to stop working, vehicle

occupants without warm clothing could

freeze.

For the sake of the environment

Coolants and additives can contaminate

the environment. If any fluids are spill

ed,

they should be collected and correctly dis-

posed of, with respect to the environment.

Coolant warning lamp

Several warning and control lamps light up

for a fe

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.



It lights up red

Excessive engine coolant temperature.

 Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon

as possible. Switch off the engine and let it cool.

Insufficient engine coolant level.

 Stop the vehicl

e! Check the engine coolant

when the engine has cooled and, if it is low, refill with

engine coolant

›››

page 199.

Engine coolant system faulty.

 Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis-

tance.



Flashes red

Faulty engine coolant system.

Request help from specialised st

aff.



It lights up blue

The natural gas engine coolant temperature is low.

The engine has not reached service temper

ature.

As long as the warning lamp is on, avoid high engine

speeds and pushing the engine too hard.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 27.

198

Checking and refilling levels

Checking the coolant level and

opping up

Fig. 183

In the engine compartment: Marking

on cool

ant e

xpansion t

ank

Fig. 184

In the engine compartment: Coolant

xpansion t

ank cap

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 33

If the coolant level is low, the coolant warning

indicator will light.

Preparations

●

Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm

ground.

●

Allow the engine to cool

›››

●

Open the bonnet 

›

page 193.

●

The coolant expansion tank is easily recog-

nisable because of the  symbol on the cap

›››

Fig. 184.

Checking the engine coolant level

●

When the engine is cold, check the coolant

level using the side marking on the expansion

tank

›››

Fig. 183.

●

If the level is below the “MIN” mark, top up

with coolant. When the engine is hot it may

be slightly above the marked area.

Topping up the engine coolant level

●

Always protect your face, hands and arms

from hot coolant and steam using a large,

thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank

cap.

●

Remove the cap very carefully

›››

●

Only refill using ne

engine cool

ant ac-

cording to SEAT specifications

(

›››



page 33)

›››

●

The engine coolant level should be be-

een the marks on the cool

ant e

xpansion

tank

›››

Fig. 183. Do not exceed the top lev-

el of the marked area

›››

●

Scr

w on the cap tightly.

●

, in the event of an emergency, you have

no coolant that is compliant to the required

specifications (

›››



page 33), do not use

another type of additive. Instead, top up with

distilled water only

›››

. Then re-establish

the corr

ect pr

oportion of the mixt

ure with the

correct additive as soon as possible

›››



page 33.

WARNING

Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious

burns.

●

Never open the coolant expansion tank if

steam or coolant is coming fr

om the engine

compartment. Wait until you cannot see or

hear any steam or coolant escaping.

●

Always wait until the engine has com-

pletely cooled before very carefully open-

ing the expansion tank cap. Contact with

hot elements of the engine can cause skin

burns.

●

When the engine is warm or hot, the cool-

ing system is pressurised. Do not unscrew

the cap on the expansion tank when the en-

gine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray

out under pressure causing burns and seri-

ous injury.

–

Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap

anti-clockwise, gently pressing down

on it.

199

Practical tips

–

Always pr

otect your face, hands and

arms from hot coolant and steam using

a large, thick cloth.

●

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them

on parts of the engine and the exhaust sys-

tem. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Un-

der specific circumstances, the ethylene

glycol can catch fire.

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the

cool

ant system, the engine may f

ail lead-

ing to serious damage.

●

Please make sure that the percentage of

additive is correct with respect to the low-

est expected ambient temperature in the

zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

●

When the outside temperature is very

low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-

cle would be immobilised. In this case, the

heating would not work either and inade-

quately dressed passengers could die of

cold.

CAUTION

●

If there is no appropriat

e coolant liquid

available, fill it using distilled water, and

nothing else. Any other type of water may

lead to considerable rusting in the engine

due to its chemical components. This could

consequently damage the engine. If you

have not used distilled water but another

type of water to top up the coolant, a spe-

cialised workshop must immediately re-

place all of the fluid in the engine cooling

system.

●

Only t

op up coolant to the top level of the

marked area

›››

Fig. 183. Otherwise the ex-

cess coolant will be forced out of the cool-

ing system when the engine is hot, causing

damage.

●

If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost,

wait for the engine to cool down complete-

ly before adding coolant. Extensive coolant

loss is an indication of leaks in the engine

cooling system. Have the engine cooling

system inspected immediately by a speci-

alised workshop. Otherwise engine dam-

age may occur.

●

When refilling service liquids, ensure that

you put the liquids into the right tank. Mak-

ing a mistake when refilling could cause se-

rious malfunctions and damage the engine!

CAUTION

The original additives should never be

mixed with coolants which ar

e not ap-

proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk

of causing severe damage to the engine

and the engine cooling system.

●

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not

purple but is, for example, brown, this indi-

cates that the G13 additive has been mixed

with an inadequate coolant. The coolant

must be changed as soon as possible if this

is the case! This could result in serious

faults and engine damage.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid l

evel

Read the additional information carefully

›››



page 34

In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs

water from the ambient air. If there is too

much water in the brake fluid, the brake sys-

tem could be damaged. In addition, the boil-

ing point of the brake fluid is significantly low-

ered. When the brake fluid contains too much

water and the brakes are subject to consider-

able forces, bubbles of water vapour can

form in the system. These bubbles can signifi-

cantly reduce braking power, notably in-

creasing braking distance, and could even re-

sult in the total failure of the brake system. En-

suring that the brake system is always func-

tioning correctly is essential for your own

safety and the safety of other road users

›››

e fluid specifications

SEAT hav

e developed a special brake fluid

optimised for the brake system of their vehi-

cles. To ensure the optimum working of the

brake system, SEAT recommends the use of

200

Checking and refilling levels

brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14

andar

. If this brake fluid is not available or

another brake fluid is used for different rea-

sons, use a brake fluid that complies with the

United States standard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

›››

e fluids conf

orming to the standard

VW 501 14, fulfil the American requirements of

the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the Ger-

man DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. How-

ever, fluids that comply with the American

FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard do not nec-

essarily comply with the VW 501 14 standard.

Always check the information on the brake

fluid container and ensure that you are using

suitable brake fluid.

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from

SEAT dealerships.

Brake fluid level

The level of the brake fluid should always be

between the MIN and MAX marks, or above

the MIN mark

›››

It is not al

ays possibl

e to check the level of

the brake fluid, as in some models the engine

components make it difficult to see the brake

fluid reservoir. If you cannot read the exact

brake fluid level, consult a specialist.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the

vehicle is being used due to wear of the brake

pads and the automatic readjustment of the

brake.

Changing the brake fluid

The brake fluid should be changed in accord-

ance with the instructions given in the Mainte-

nance Programme. Have the brake fluid

changed by a specialised workshop. SEAT

recommends taking your car in for technical

service. This means that only brake fluid com-

plying with the required specifications will be

used.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-

ble/old br

ake fluid is used, the brake sys-

tem may fail or braking power may be re-

duced.

●

Check the brake system and the brake

fluid level regularly!

●

The brake fluid should be changed regu-

larly in accordance with the instructions

given in the Maintenance Programme.

●

Always ensure that you use suitable

brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that com-

plies with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4

or DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards. Other

types of brake fluids can affect the opera-

tion of the brakes and decrease braking

power. Do not use a brake fluid if the con-

tainer does not specify compliance with

the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or

DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

●

The replacement br

ake fluid must be

new.

●

Brake fluid should be stored in the closed

original container in a safe place out of

reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

●

If the brake fluid is left in the system for

too long and the brakes are subjected to

heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the

brake system. This would seriously affect

the efficiency of the brakes and the safety

of the vehicle. This may cause an accident.

CAUTION

Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.

Wipe off any brake fluid fr

om the paintwork

immediately.

For the sake of the environment

Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant.

Collect any spilt service fluids and allo

w a

professional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking and t

opping up the wind-

scr

een w

asher reservoir with water

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 34

201

Practical tips

Check the water level in the windscreen

asher r

eserv

oir regularly and top up as re-

quired.

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

●

The washer reservoir is marked with the

symbol  on the lid.

●

Check there is enough water in the reser-

voir.

●

To top up, mix water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT

›››

. Please follow

the instructions f

or use f

ound on the pack

ag-

ing.

●

In cold weather, a special antifreeze should

also be added to prevent the water from

freezing.

Reservoir capacity

The washer bottle capacity is approximately

3 litres.

WARNING

If the water from the windscreen washer

does not contain enough anti-free

ze, it may

freeze on the windscreen and rear window,

reducing forward and rear visibility.

●

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer

contains enough anti-freeze.

●

In cold conditions, you should not use the

windscreen wiper system unless you have

warmed the windscreen with the ventila-

tion system. The antifreeze could freeze on

the windscreen and reduce visibilit

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other

simil

ar additives with the windscr

een wash-

er water. A greasy layer may be formed on

the windscreen which will impair visibility.

●

Use clean water with a window cleaner

recommended by SEAT.

●

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to

the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION

●

Do not mix cleaning products r

ecommen-

ded by SEAT with other products. This

could lead to flocculation and may block

the windscreen washer jets.

●

When topping up service fluids, make ab-

solutely certain that you fill the fluids into

the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions and

engine damage!

Vehicle battery

Intr

oduction

Read the additional information carefully

›



page 34.

The battery is a component of the vehicle's

electrical system.

Never work on the electrical system without

fully understanding the operations required,

the applicable safety standards and without

the correct tools

›››

! If required, have any

ork carried out by a specialised w

orkshop

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service. Negligent work can cause

serious injury.

Location of the vehicle battery

The battery is located in the engine compart-

ment.

Explanation of the warning indications on

the vehicle's battery



Wear eye protection!



Battery acid is very corrosive and

caustic. Always w

ear protective gloves

and eye protection!



Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking

are prohibit

ed.



A highly explosive mixture of gases is

released when the batt

ery is under

charge.



Keep children away from acid and bat-

teries!

202

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

Working on the vehicle battery and the

electrical system can cause corr

osion, fire

and electric shocks. Always read and take

into account the following warnings and

safety standards before carrying out any

work:

●

Before working on the battery, switch off

the engine, the ignition and all electrical

devices then disconnect the negative con-

nection on the battery.

●

Keep children away from acid and the

battery itself!

●

Wear eye protection.

●

Battery acid is very corrosive and caus-

tic. It can burn skin and cause blindness.

When handling the battery, protect your-

self from splashes of acids, above all your

hands, arms and face.

●

Do not smoke and never work close to

places exposed to flames or sparks.

●

Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharg-

es when working with cables and electrical

devices.

●

Never short the battery terminals.

●

Never use a damaged battery. It can ex-

plode. Replace a damaged battery imme-

diately.

●

Replaced damaged or frozen batteries as

soon as possible. A flat battery can also

freeze at temperatures close to 0°C

(+32°F).

CAUTION

●

Never disconnect the batt

ery if the igni-

tion is switched on or if the engine is run-

ning. This could damage the electrical sys-

tem or electronic components.

●

Do not expose the battery to direct sun-

light over a long period of time, as the in-

tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the

battery housing.

●

If the car is left standing for long periods,

protect the battery from extreme cold tem-

perature so that it does not “freeze up” and

become damaged.

Warning lamp



It lights up

Faulty generator.

Contact a specialised workshop

. Have the electrical

system checked.

Disconnect any unnecessary electrical devices. The

generator does not charge the battery while the ve-

hicle is in motion.

Several warning and control lamps light up

or a f

w seconds when the ignition is switch-

ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-

onds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings

›››

in Con-

trol and warning l

amps on page 27.

Checking the electrolyte level of

the vehicle batt

ery

Fig. 185

In the engine compartment: remove

the lid fr

om the v

ehicl

e's battery.

The battery's electrolyte level should be

check

ed r

egul

arly in high-mileage vehicles, in

hot countries and in older batteries. Other

batteries do not require maintenance.

Vehicles fitted with the Start-Stop system are

equipped with special batteries. For technical

reasons, the electrolyte level cannot be

checked in these batteries.

203

Practical tips

Preparations

●

Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine

compartment

›

page 193

●

Open the bonnet 

›››

page 193.

●

Press on the tabs

›››

Fig. 185 (arrows) in the

direction of the arrows and lift the battery

cover up.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

●

Make sure there is sufficient lighting to

clearly recognise the colours. Never use

flames or shiny objects as a light source.

●

Depending on the level of acid, the Magic

eye on the top of the battery will change col-

our.

Colour indi-

cator

Necessary operations

Light yell

ow or

colourless

The el

ectrolyte level of the vehi-

cle's batt

ery is too low. Have the

battery checked and, where ap-

plicable, replaced by a special-

ised workshop.

Black

The electrolyte level of the vehi-

cle's batt

ery is correct.

WARNING

Working with the vehicle battery involves a

risk of corrosion, expl

osions and electric

shock.

●

Never tilt the v

ehicle battery. Battery

acid could spill out of the openings for the

release of gases and cause corrosion dam-

age.

●

Never open the vehicle battery.

●

If battery acid splashes on you, immedi-

ately rinse your eyes and skin abundantly

with water for several minutes. Then seek

medical care immediately.

●

If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a

doctor immediately.

Charging, replacing and connect-

ing or disconnecting the batt

ery

Charging the battery

The v

ehicl

e batt

ery should be charged by a

specialised workshop only, as batteries using

special technology have been installed and

they must be charged in a controlled environ-

ment

›››

. SEAT recommends taking your

car in f

or t

echnical service

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the

conditions of its location and has special

safety features. If the battery must be re-

placed, consult a technical service for infor-

mation on electromagnetic compatibility, the

size and maintenance, performance and

safety requirements of the new battery in

your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT

recommends you have the battery replaced

by a technical service.

Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries

conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73

Standards. These standards must be dated

April 2008 or later.

Vehicles fitted with the Start-Stop system are

equipped with a special battery. Therefore,

this battery must only be replaced by anoth-

er with the same specifications.

Disconnecting the vehicle's battery

If you must disconnect the battery from the

electrical system, please note the following:

●

Switch off the ignition and all electrical

equipment.

●

The vehicle must be unlocked before dis-

connecting the battery, otherwise the alarm

will be triggered.

●

First disconnect the negative cable and

then the positive

›››

Connecting the v

ehicl

e's batt

ery

●

Before reconnecting the battery, switch off

the engine and all electrical devices.

●

First reconnect the positive cable and then

the negative

›››

Diff

ent contr

ol lamps may light up after

connecting the battery and switching the

204

Checking and refilling levels

ignition on. They will be turned off after a

short trip at a speed of betw

een 15-20 km/h

(

10-

12 mph). If the warning indicators remain

lit, please visit a specialised workshop to

have the vehicle checked.

If the battery has been disconnected for a

long time, it is possible that the next service

date is not displayed or calculated correctly

›››

page 88. Respect the maximum service

intervals permitted

›››

page 217.

Automatic device disconnection

The intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-

matically implements a range of measures to

prevent the battery from discharging when

high demands are made on it:

●

The idling speed is increased so that the al-

ternator provides more electricity.

●

Where necessary, the power to the most

powerful devices is reduced or even com-

pletely disconnected.

●

On starting the engine, the power supply

from the 12-volt power sockets and the ciga-

rette lighter may be interrupted for a short

time.

The on-board management program cannot

always prevent the battery from running flat.

For example, if the ignition is left on for a long

period with the engine off or if the side lights

or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is

stationary.

Why the battery runs flat:

●

When stationary for a long time without

starting the engine, particularly if the ignition

is switched on.

●

Use of electrical devices with the engine

switched off.

WARNING

Incorrectly securing the battery or using

the wrong battery can cause shor

t-circuits,

fire and serious injuries.

●

Always use only maintenance-free bat-

teries, protected to prevent a leak, and

whose properties, specifications and size

correspond to the standard battery.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-

leased when the battery is under char

ge.

●

The batteries should be charged in a

well-ventilated room only.

●

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed

battery. A flat battery can also freeze at

temperatures close to 0°C (+32°F).

●

Always replace a battery which has fro-

zen.

●

Battery cables not correctly connected

may cause a short circuit. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negative

cable.

CAUTION

●

Never disconnect the batt

ery if the igni-

tion is switched on or if the engine is run-

ning. This could damage the electrical sys-

tem or electronic components.

●

Never plug accessories that supply cur-

rent, such as solar panels or a battery

charger, to the 12-volt power socket or the

cigarette lighter. This could damage the

vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment

Dispose of the battery in an environment-

friendly manner. Batteries cont

ain toxic

substances such as sulphuric acid and

lead.

For the sake of the environment

Battery acid can contaminate the environ-

ment. Collect any spilt service fluids and

dispose of them correctly.

205

Practical tips

Wheels and tyres

Intr

oduction

SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and

wheels is carried out by a specialised work

shop. These workshops have the necessary

special tools and replacement parts, trained

personnel and facilities for disposing of the

old tyres while respecting the environment.

SEAT recommends taking your car in for

technical service.

WARNING

The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or

braked if the t

yres (new or used) are worn

or damaged.

●

Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could

make driving more dangerous and result in

serious accidents and damage.

●

All four wheels must be fitted with radial

tyres of the same type, size (rolling circum-

ference) and the same tread pattern.

●

New tyres do not give maximum grip and

will not have reached their maximum brak-

ing capacity to start with, and therefore

need running in. To prevent accidents and

major damage, extreme caution should be

taken for the first 600 km.

●

Check tyre pr

essures regularly and en-

sure they are maintained at the pressures

indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low,

they could overheat, resulting in tread de-

tachment or even burst tyres.

●

Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut,

cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving

on damaged or worn tyres could result in

burst tyres, serious accidents or damage.

Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced

immediately.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of

tyre fitted on your vehicle.

●

The effectiveness of driver and brake as-

sistance systems also depends on the grip

of the tyres.

●

If you notice unusual vibration or if the

vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop

the car immediately and check the tyres

and wheels for damage.

●

To minimise the risk of losing control of

the vehicle or causing a serious accident,

never undo the bolted joints of beadlock

wheels.

●

Never mount used tyres or wheels if you

are not sure of their previous history. They

may be damaged, although the damage is

not immediately visible.

●

Old tyres, even if they have never been

used, may lose air or burst unexpectedly

while driving, especially at high speeds, re-

sulting in serious accident and injury. If

tyres are over six years old, they should on-

ly be used in an emergency and with ex-

eme caution.

Note

For technical reasons, it is not generally

possibl

e to use the wheel

s from other vehi-

cles. In some cases, this may also be true

for the same model of wheel. Please refer

to the vehicle documentation or ask at a

technical service.

Handling tyres and wheels

Fig. 186 Diagram for changing wheels.

The tyres of a vehicle are the components

which ar

e sub

ject

ed to most stress and are

the most underestimated. Tyres are very im-

portant, as the support offered by their nar-

row surface is the only point of contact be-

tween the vehicle and the road.

206

Wheels and tyres

The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre

essur

, driving style, the care they receive

and the correct fitting.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential

part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and

rims approved by SEAT are specially match-

ed to the characteristics of the vehicle and

our critical to good road holding and safe

handling.

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels

●

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar

obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as

possible at a right angle to the kerb.

●

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage

(punctures, cuts, cracks, dents).

●

Remove any foreign bodies found on the

outside of the tyre tread and ensure that they

have not passed through the wall of the

tyre

›››

page 211.

●

In addition, the instructions for tyre control

systems should always be observed.

●

Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as

possible

›››

page 211.

●

Regularly check tyres for non-visible dam-

age

›››

page 211.

●

Never exceed the maximum permitted

speed or loads specified for the type of tyre

fitted on your vehicle

›››

page 214.

●

Do not allow tyres (including the spare

wheel) to come into contact with aggressive

substances, grease, oil, fuel or brake fluid

›››

●

Lost valve caps should be replaced imme-

diat

ely.

es with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have

been designed to operate best when rotating

in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre

sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on

tyres with directional tread

›››

page 214. Al-

ways observe the direction of rotation indica-

ted when mounting the wheel. This guaran-

tees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua-

planing, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction

of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the

tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is

of particular importance when the road sur-

face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-

sible or remount it with the correct direction

of rotation.

Interchanging tyres

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres

the wheels should be changed round from

time to time according to the system

›››

Fig. 186. The useful life of all the tyres will

then be about the same time.

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop to have the tyres

changed.

Tyres over 6 years old

Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a

result of physical and chemical processes.

This may affect their performance. Tyres

which are stored for long periods of time

without being used, harden and become

more fragile than tyres which are in constant

use.

SEAT recommends that tyres over six years

old are replaced with new tyres. This also ap-

plies to tyres (including the spare wheel)

which appear to be in perfect condition on

the outside and which have a tread depth

within the values stipulated by the Law

›››

The dat

e of manuf

act

ure, part of the tyre

identification number (TIN), indicates the age

of the tyre ()

›››

page 214.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate

the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards,

backwards). This ensures you will be able to

mount them correctly when you replace

them. When removed, the wheels and/or

tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and pref-

erably dark location. Do not place tyres

mounted on the wheel in a vertical position.

Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from dirt

by storing them in suitable bags and standing

them on the ground on their tread.

207

Practical tips

WARNING

Aggressive fluids or substances could re-

sult in visible or invisible damage with the

consequent risks.

●

ways ensure that tyres do not come in-

to contact with chemical products, oil,

grease, fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive

substances.

WARNING

Old tyres, even if they have never been

used, may lose air or burst unexpect

edly

while driving, resulting in serious accident

or damage.

●

If tyres are over six years old, they should

only be used in an emergency and with ex-

treme caution.

For the sake of the environment

Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified

personnel according to the l

aws in the

country concerned.

Wheels

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the

rims. If diff

ent rims ar

e fitted, the correct

wheel bolts with the right length and correct-

ly shaped bolt heads must be used. This en-

sures that wheels are fitted securely and that

the brake system functions correctly

›››

page 72.

For technical reasons, it is not generally pos-

sible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In

some cases, this may also be true for the

same model of wheel.

The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are

specially matched to the characteristics of

the vehicle and are critical to good road

holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct

torque

›››

page 72.

Beadlock wheel rims

Beadlock wheel rims have various compo-

nents. These are joined together by special

bolts using a special procedure. This ensures

good performance, a better seal, improved

safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn

rims should always be replaced and must on-

ly be repaired in a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a technical service

›››

Wheel rims with bolt

ed trims

Wheel rims may be fitt

ed with int

erchangea-

ble trim parts which are attached to the rim

using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should

only be replaced at a specialised workshop.

SEAT recommends visiting a technical service

›››

WARNING

The use of worn or damaged wheel rims

could make driving mor

e dangerous and

result in serious accidents and damage.

●

Only wheel rims which have been ap-

proved for use with your vehicle should be

used.

●

Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage

and replace as required.

WARNING

If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted

ring trims are not correctly tight

ened or

loosened, this could result in serious acci-

dent.

●

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel

rims with bolted ring trims.

●

Any work relating to wheel rims with bol-

ted rims should be carried out at special-

ised workshop. SEAT recommends taking

your car in for technical service.

Note

A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted

to find out whether wheels or t

yres of dif-

ferent sizes to those originally fitted by

SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about

the combinations allowed between the

front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).

208

Wheels and tyres

Replacement of wheel rims and

w t

New tyres

●

When tyres are new, drive with extreme

caution for the first 600 km, as all tyr

es need

to be run-in. Tyres which have not been run in

do not have such good grip or

›››

braking

capacity

››

›

●

All four wheels must be fitted with radial

tyres of the same t

ype, size (rolling circumfer-

ence) and the same tread pattern.

●

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the t

ype and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Replacing tyres

●

Where possible, always replace both

wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front

axle or both wheels on the rear axle)

›››

●

Only replace used tyres with those author-

ised by SEAT f

or the corr

esponding t

ype vehi-

cle. Pay special attention to size, diameter,

and maximum load and speed capacity.

●

Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT

approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they

may knock or rub against the chassis or other

components, resulting in damage.

WARNING

New tyres do not give maximum grip and

will not have reached their maximum br

ak-

ing capacity to start with, and therefore

need running in.

●

To prevent accidents and major damage,

extreme caution should be taken for the

first 600 km.

WARNING

There should be adequate space between

the tyres and the v

ehicle in accordance

with the vehicle design. If this is not the

case, the tyres may rub against parts of the

running gear, chassis or brake lines, lead-

ing to faults in the brake system or to tread

detachment, and the risk of burst tyres.

●

The true tyre dimension should not be

greater than the dimensions of tyres manu-

factured and approved by SEAT and should

not rub against parts of the vehicle.

Note

Although tyres may be shown as being the

same size, the true dimensions of diff

erent

types of tyre may vary with respect to the

nominal size, or tread patterns may be dif-

ferent.

Note

If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT,

you can be sure that the true tyr

e dimen-

sions will be correct for your vehicle. For

other tyre model

s, the tyre vendor should

provide the manufacturer's certificate with

the tyre, indicating that this type of tyre is

suitable for your vehicle. This certificate

should always be carried with the vehicle.

Tyre pressures

Fig. 187

Position of tyre pressure specification

The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at

the f

act

ory is sho

wn on a label and is valid for

summer and winter tyres. The label

209

Practical tips

›››

Fig. 187 is l

ocat

ed on the driv

er's door pil-

lar.

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce

the life of the tyres considerably and also im-

pair the car's handling

›››

. It is essential to

maint

ain the corr

ect t

yre pressures, especial-

ly if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre

pressure causes premature wear and could

cause tyre blow-out.

The pressure should therefore be checked at

least once a month and before starting a

journey.

As a general rule, the pressures given are for

cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pres-

sures are greater.

Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the

required pressure. This could result in very low

tyre pressures which may lead to sudden

blow-outs.

Tyre pressure monitoring system

Check tyre pressures only when the vehicle

has not been driven for more than a few kilo-

metres at low speeds in the past three hours.

●

The tyre pressures should be checked reg-

ularly, and only when the tyres are cold. Al-

ways check all tyres, including the spare

wheel. Tyre pressures should be checked

more often in colder regions, and only when

the vehicle has not been driven recently. Al-

ways use a correctly-operating tyre gauge.

●

Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in

the vehicle.

●

After adjusting the tyre pressure, check that

the caps are properly screwed on.

The spare wheel or temporary spare wheel

must always be kept at the maximum pres-

sure stipulated.

WARNING

If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the

tyre may defl

ate or burst suddenly while

driving. This could result in a serious acci-

dent.

●

If the tyre pressure is too low, they could

overheat, resulting in tread detachment or

even burst tyres.

●

When driving at high speeds and/or fully

loaded, the tyre could suddenly overheat,

burst or be subject to tread detachment,

with the resultant loss of control of the ve-

hicle.

●

Tyre pressures which are too high or too

low reduce the service life of the tyre, af-

fecting the vehicle's performance.

●

Tyre pressures should be checked regu-

larly, at least once a month and before

long journeys.

●

Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the

vehicle load.

●

Never deflate excess pressure from hot

tyres.

CAUTION

●

Take car

e not to tilt the manometer when

placing it on the valve. Otherwise, the valve

may be damaged.

●

If tyre valves are not protected by caps,

or if the caps are not screwed on correctly,

they may become damaged. Check that

the caps are identical to the standard caps

and have been correctly tightened.

For the sake of the environment

Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-

sumption.

Wear indicator depth profile

Fig. 188 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Tread depth

Cert

ain driving conditions r

equir

e a deeper

tread, as well as needing the tread to be

210

Wheels and tyres

approximately the same on the front and rear

es. This is particul

arly important when driv-

ing in winter, in cold temperatures and on wet

roads

›››

The minimum tr

ead depth r

equir

ed by law in

the majority of cases is 1.6 mm, measured in

the tread grooves next to the tread wear indi-

cators. Observe legal requirements in each

country.

The performance of winter tyres is much re-

duced when the tread has worn to 4 mm.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac-

cording to the type and make of tyre and the

tread pattern.

Wear indicators on the tyre

The original tyres on your vehicle have

1.6 mm high

›››

Fig. 188 tread wear indicators

running across the tread. A number of these

indicators are equally spaced around the

tyre tread. Certain marks on the tyre walls

(e.g. the letters “TWI” or other symbols) indi-

cate the position of the wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is

worn. They must always be replaced before

the tyre tread has worn to the level of the in-

dicator.

WARNING

Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and

may lead to l

oss of control of the vehicle

with serious consequences.

●

Tyres must be replaced before the wear

indicators are at the same level as the

tread pattern.

●

Worn tyres have significantly reduced

grip, especially on wet surfaces, increasing

the risk of “aquaplaning”.

●

Worn tyres make control of the vehicle

more difficult in normal or difficult driving

conditions, increasing the braking distance

and the risk of skidding.

Tyre damage

Damage to wheels and tyres is often invisible

o the nak

ed eye

. If you notice unusual vibra-

tion or the car pulling to one side, this may

indicate that one of the tyres is damaged

›››

●

Slow down immediately if you think you

hav

e a damaged wheel.

●

Check the wheel

s and t

yres for damage.

●

If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek

qualified assistance.

●

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive

slowly and carefully to the nearest special-

ised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Foreign bodies in the tyre

●

Do not remove foreign bodies if they have

penetrated through the tyre wall!

●

You should obtain professional assistance

immediately.

Tyre wear

The wear of tyres depends on a number of

factors, for example:

●

Driving style.

●

Unbalanced wheels.

●

Running gear settings.

Driving style: driving round bends quickly or

sudden acceleration or braking speed accel-

erates tyre wear. When the driving style is

normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the

running gear settings checked at a special-

ised workshop.

Eccentricity of the wheels: the wheels of a

new vehicle are balanced. However, certain

circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-

out), which is detected as vibrations in the

steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the

steering and suspension. In the event of run

out, the wheels should be balanced again.

When a new wheel is fitted, it should be bal-

anced again.

Adjustments of the running gear: misaligned

running gear increases the wear of the tyres

and affects safety while driving. If tyres wear

211

Practical tips

too quickly, have the wheel alignment

check

ed at a specialised w

orkshop

Low profile tyres

Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and

tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and

a greater rim diameter along with a lower

height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a

more agile driving behaviour. However, on

roads that are in poor condition, this might af-

fect comfort and cause more noise.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres, for instance due to

strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and

kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre

pressure is particularly important

›››

page 209.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive

with special care when driving on roads in

poor condition.

Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-

garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on

the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on

the rims.

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy

impact or have been damaged, have them

checked and, if required, replaced at a speci-

alised workshop.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-

ly than standard tyres.

WARNING

If you notice unusual vibration or the car

pulls to one side whil

e driving, this may in-

dicate that one of the tyres is damaged.

●

Reduce speed immediately and stop,

while observing the highway code.

●

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

●

Never carry on driving on worn tyres or

wheels. Request qualified assistance im-

mediately.

●

If there is no visible exterior damage,

drive slowly and carefully to the nearest

specialised workshop and have the vehicle

checked.

Tyre monitor system*

Fig. 189

Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-

em butt

on.

Control lamp



It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the

value set by the driver

›

››

The tyre pressure loss indicator compares the

rev

olutions and thus the wheel diameter of

each wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diam-

eter of a wheel changes, the control indicator

of the tyres informs of this fact . The wheel

diameter changes when:

●

Tyre pressure is insufficient.

●

The tyre structure is damaged.

●

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a

load.

●

The wheels of one axl

e are under more

pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or

on steep slopes).

●

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.

●

The temporary spare wheel is fitted.

●

The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure adjustment

On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one

or more wheels, the

›››

Fig. 189 button must

be kept pressed down, with the ignition on,

until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-

ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),

the tyre pressure must be increased to the

212

Wheels and tyres

recommended value for a full load (see the

stick

er on the inside of the fuel fl

ap). If the t

yre

monitor system button is pressed down, the

new tyre pressures are confirmed.

WARNING

●

When the tyre pr

essure control lamp

lights up, reduce speed immediately and

avoid any sudden turning or braking ma-

noeuvre. Stop when possible, and check

the tyre pressure and status.

●

The driver is responsible for maintaining

correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre

pressure must be regularly checked.

●

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when

driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi-

tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control

lamp may light up belatedly or may func-

tion incorrectly.

Note

If the battery is disconnected, the yellow

warning lamp

 lights up after turning the

ignition on. This should turn off after a brief

journey.

Spare wheel or temporary spare

wheel*

Fig. 190

In the boot: hand controlled wheel for

securing the spar

e wheel

Removing the spare wheel

●

Open the rear lid and lift the luggage com-

partment shelf

›

page 122.

●

If necessary, remove the boot variable floor

›››

page 122.

●

Lift up the carpet from the recess and re-

move it from the luggage compartment.

●

If necessary, take out the vehicle tool kit

with the container.

●

Completely remove the hand controlled

wheel from the centre of the spare wheel

›››

Fig. 190 by turning it in an anticlockwise

direction, and take out the spare wheel.

Storing the replaced wheel

●

Pull back the carpet.

●

With the wheel rim facing downwards, sit-

uate the replaced wheel in the spare wheel

well so that the wheel rim central hole coin-

cides with the opening.

●

Turn the hand controlled wheel with the

shank screwed clockwise until the replaced

wheel is secured.

●

If necessary, store the vehicle tool in the

container, inside the boot.

●

Replace the carpet on the boot floor.

●

Lower the rear shelf.

●

Close the rear lid.

If the spare wheel is different to the rest of

the vehicle tyres

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres

that are mounted on the vehicle - for example

with winter tyres or the temporary spare

wheel - you should only use the spare tyre for

a short period of time and drive with extra

care

›››

efit the normal r

oad wheel as soon as possi-

Please observe driving advice:

●

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

●

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and

fast cornering.

213

Practical tips

●

Sno

w chains on the t

empor

ary spare wheel

are not permitted

›››



page 42.

●

After mounting the spare wheel or the tem-

porary spare wheel, check the tyre pressure

as soon as possible

›››

page 209.

It is advisable to check the spare wheel or

temporary spare wheel tyre pressure when

checking the rest of the vehicle wheels at

least once a month. The spare wheel should

have the highest pressure allowed for the ve-

hicle

›››

page 209. The sticker situated on

the temporary spare wheel shows the tyre

pressure.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the spare wheel or

the temporary spar

e wheel can cause loss

of vehicle control, producing collisions or

other serious accidents and injury.

●

Never use the spare wheel or the tempo-

rary spare wheel if it is damaged or worn to

the wear indicator.

●

In some vehicles the spare wheel is

smaller than the original tyres. This can be

seen on a sticker showing the text

“80 km/h” and “50 mph”. This text indi-

cates the maximum velocity permitted for

this type of tyre.

●

Never drive faster than 80 km/h

(50 mph). Avoid powerful acceleration,

hard braking and taking corners at high

speed.

●

Never driv

e more than 200 km with a

temporary spare wheel fitted to the drive

axle.

●

Replace the temporary spare wheel for a

normal wheel as soon as possible. The

compact temporary spare wheel is only in-

tended for temporary use over short dis-

tances.

●

The temporary spare wheel must always

be secured with the factory supplied wheel

bolts.

●

You should never use more than one tem-

porary spare wheel.

●

After mounting the temporary spare

wheel, check the tyre pressure as soon as

possible

›››

page 209.

●

Snow chains on the temporary spare

wheel are not permitted.

Note

Wherever possible, secure the spare wheel,

temporary spar

e wheel or the replaced

wheel safely in the luggage compartment.

In vehicles with anti-puncture kit, it is not

possible to secure the defective wheel.

Tyre code

Fig. 191

Universal code on tyres

Radial

Rim diamet

er code

oad inde

x & speed rating

DOT tyre identification number

Severe snow conditions

Tyre ply composition and materials used

Max. load rating

Treadwear, traction and temperature

grades

Max. permissible inflation pressure

Passenger car tyre

Nominal width of tyre in millimetres

214

Wheels and tyres

Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

Tyre code (example): Meaning

P185 / 55 R 15: Size:

P Passenger vehicle code.

185

Nominal width between walls, in

mm.

55 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre type (R indicates "radial").

15 Rim diameter in inches

109 H Load index

›

page 216 and

speed rating

›››

page 216.

XL Reinforced tyres (“Reinforced”).

M+S or M/S or



Winter tyres code (mud and snow

tyres).

RADIAL

TUBELESS

adial tyre without inner tube.

E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies

with international legisl

ation fol-

lowed by a number denoting the

country granting the authorisa-

tion. The authorisation number

( several digits) is shown below.

DOT BT RA TY5 1716: Tyre identification number

(TIN

, maybe only on exterior w

all of the wheel) and

date of manufacture.

Tyre code (example): Meaning

DOT The tyre complies with the legal

requirements of the US Depart

ment of Transport, responsible for

tyre safety regulations.

BT Place of manufacture code.

RA Information about manufacturer

and tyre siz

TY5 Manufacturer's tyre specifica-

tions.

1716 Manufacturing date: week 17 of

2016.

TWI This identifies the position of the

Tread W

ear Indicator

›››

page 210.

MAX LOAD

615 KG

(1356 LBS)

US load rating, indicating maxi-

mum permitted load per tyre.

MAX INFLATION

350 KPA

(51 PSI)

US limit, indicating maximum per-

mitted tyre pressure.

SIDEWALL 1 PLY

RAYON

Information about tyre wall com-

ponents: 1 layer of rayon (artificial

silk).

TREAD 4 PLIES

1 RAYON +

2 STEEL + 1 NY-

LON

Information about tread compo-

nents: In the example, there are 4

layers below the tread: 1 layer of

rayon (artificial silk), 2 layers of

steel reinforcement and 1 layer of

nylon.

Tyre code (example): Meaning

Information for the end consumer concerning the

comparative v

alues of the established base tyres

(standardised test procedures):

TREAD-

WEAR 280

Relative service life of the tyre,

with respect to specific US st

and-

ard test.

TRACTION A Braking capacity of tyre on wet

surface (AA, A, B or C).

TEMPERA-

TURE A

Tyr

e temperature resistance at

higher test speeds (A, B or C).

If there ar

e different letters, they are specific co-

des of the tyre manuf

acturer or specific national

codes.

The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number.

es with dir

ectional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have

been designed to operate best when rotating

in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre

sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on

tyres with directional tread. Always observe

the direction of rotation indicated when

mounting the wheel. This guarantees opti-

mum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning,

grip, noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction

of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the

tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is

of particular importance when the road sur-

face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as

215

Practical tips

possible or remount it with the correct direc-

tion of r

ation.

yre load rating

The load rating code indicates the maximum

load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry

(load capacity).

425 kg

462 kg

487 kg

515 kg

545 kg

615 kg

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximum

speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” for

tyres with a maximum authorised speed

above 240 km/h.

216

Service

Maintenance

Service

Service int

erv

Servicing and Digital Maintenance

Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-

tenance Plan”)

The SEAT deal

ership or a specialised work-

shop records Service receipts in a central

system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-

mentation of the service history, it is possible

to reproduce the services performed any

time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service

receipt after every service carried out con-

taining all the services carried out on the sys-

tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt is

replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-

able in some markets. In this case, your

SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-

rent documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Pl

an, your SEAT

authorised service or specialised workshop

documents the following information:

●

When each one of the services was carried

out.

●

Whether a specific repair has been sugges-

ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near

future.

●

If you have expressed a special request for

the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will

write the work order.

●

The components or fluids that were

changed.

●

The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until

the next inspection. This information is docu-

mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service may

vary from one vehicle to another. A special-

ised workshop will be able to provide specific

information on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic cause an accident and severe in-

juries.

●

Make sure that any r

epairs are carried

out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-

alised workshop.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

o the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Note

Regular services on the vehicle not only

maintain its value

, but also its correct oper-

ation and road safety. For this reason, con-

duct the services in accordance with SEAT

guidelines.

Fixed Service or Flexible Service

Services are classified as oil change service

and inspection. The service int

erv

al displ

on the instrument panel display serves as a

reminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine and

the conditions of use of the car, either the

Fixed service or the Flexible service will be

applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs

to his vehicle

●

Check the tables below:

217

Maintenance

Oil change service

PR No.

Type of

service

Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after

1 year

QI2

Every 7500 km or after

1 year

QI3

Every

10000 km or after

1 year

QI4

Every

15000 km or after

1 year

QI6 Fle

xible

According to the service in-

erv

al displ

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Whatever happens first.

Inspection Service

According to the service interval display

The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the inf

ormation about the speci-

fications of the engine oil accor

ding t

o the

VW standard

›››



page 32.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible

Service

Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil

change service only has to be performed

when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take into

account the individual conditions of use and

personal driving style. A major component of

the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-

stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-

fications of the engine oil according to the

VW standard

›››



page 32.

If you do not want to the flexible service

you can select the fixed service However,

a fixed service may affect service costs

The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service intervals display

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-

ted by the service interval display on the in-

strument panel display

›››

page 90. The

service interval display gives information for

service dates that involve an engine oil

change or an inspection. When the time for

the corresponding service comes, additional

work required, such as the change of brake

fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information on the conditions of

use

The service intervals and groups are usually

based on normal conditions of use.

, on the other hand, the v

ehicl

e is under ad-

verse conditions of use, some of the work

must be carried out before the next service

period or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

●

The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.

●

Frequent short trips.

●

Letting the engine idle for a long period of

time, as in the case of taxis.

●

Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.

●

Frequent driving with a trailer (depending

on equipment).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a

lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).

●

Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following

parts (depending on equipment):

●

Dust and pollen filter

●

Air Care allergen filter

●

Air filter

●

Toothed chain

●

Particulate filter

●

Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialised

workshop will gladly inform you about the

need of performing service work between

normal service intervals, always considering

the conditions of use of your vehicle.

218

Service

WARNING

If the services are insufficient or not per-

formed and if the service interv

als are not

observed, the vehicle may be immobilised

in traffic and cause accidents and severe

injuries.

●

Have the services conducted at author-

ised SEAT services or specialised work-

shops.

CAUTION

SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage

to the vehicl

e due to insufficient work or of

lack of availability of spare parts.

Sets of services

Sets of services include all the maint

enance

orks

needed to ensure the safety and the

smooth running of the vehicle (depending on

the conditions of use and the features of

the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or

operating fluids). Maintenance services are

divided into inspection and review services.

Consult the details of the jobs required for

your vehicle at:

●

Your SEAT authorised service

●

Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-

opment of components) the sets of services

may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or

specialised workshop is always receiving up-

dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-

ceived for their v

ehicles and approved by

SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.

These parts correspond exactly to the manu-

facturer's requirements in terms of design,

accuracy of the measurements and materi-

als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been

conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this

reason, we always recommend the use of

Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be

held liable for the safety and suitability of

parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-

act

er's requirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,

gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical

components, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are the

same as the factory parts, which are also ap-

proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT Original

Accessories and SEAT approv

ed accessories

for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and

suitability of these accessories have been in-

spected specifically for this type of vehicle.

SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and

suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT

Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEAT

ehicl

e you will be abl

e to enjoy the benefits

and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,

your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-

ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-

ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-

od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as

you carry out the recommended Inspection

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-

ised Service.

219

Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a

ault or an accident, our assist

ance services

will help you k

eep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT Mobility

Service differs depending on the country in

which the vehicle was purchased. For further

information ask your SEAT dealership or the

SEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect

condition of ne

w v

ehicl

es. Check the pur-

chase agreement or complementary addi-

tional documentation provided by your Tech-

nical Service to see the conditions and the

terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-

mation in this regard in your SEAT Official

Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maint

enance and cl

eaning

Basic consider

ations

Regular and careful care helps to maintain

the value of your vehicl

e. In addition, it may

become a prerequisite to demand the war-

ranty in the event of corrosion damage and

deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-

work.

Specialised workshops have the necessary

care products. Please follow the instructions

for application on the packaging.

WARNING

●

Cleaning products and other mat

erials

used for car care can be damaging to your

health if misused.

●

Always keep care products in a safe

place, out of the reach of children. Danger

of poisoning!

For the sake of the environment

●

When purchasing car care pr

oducts,

chose products that are compatible with

the environment.

●

The waste from car-care products should

not be disposed of with ordinary household

waste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.

remains of insects, bird e

xcrements, tree resin

or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the

more damage it can cause to the surface.

High temperatures, for instance strong sun-

light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt using

plenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird

droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and

a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-

ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaners

When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-

sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-

structions for the equipment. This applies

particularly to the operating pressure and the

distance between the spraying water. Do not

aim the jet directly to the side window gas-

kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-

roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-

ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or

camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least

40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-

pressure cleaner.

220

Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out

in a dir

ect str

eam or one that has a r

otating

jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed

60°C.

Automatic car wash tunnels

Spray the vehicle before starting the car

wash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-

amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen

wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-

structions of the car wash tunnel operator,

especially if your vehicle has detachable

parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a

soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-

ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by

hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when

washing it, first remove the thicker dust and

dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and

fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner

for matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To

avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do

not apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with

a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-

bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water

and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of

water with a leather cloth.

WARNING

●

Only wash the vehicl

e with the ignition

switched off or according to the specifica-

tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk

of accident!

●

When cleaning the underbody or the in-

side of the wheel arches, protect yourself

from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of

cut!

●

After cleaning the brakes could act more

slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice

on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-

dent! In this case the brakes should be

dried by pressing the brake pedal several

times.

CAUTION

●

Before w

ashing the vehicle in an auto-

matic car wash, please make sure to re-

tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them

from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-

ployed electrically!

●

Do not w

ash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Risk of damaging the paint job!

●

Do not use sponges, abrasive household

sponges or similar to clean insect remains.

Risk of damaging the surface!

●

Vehicle parts with matte paint:

–

Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!

–

Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-

age the appearance of matte paint.

–

Do not put stickers or magnets on parts

with matte paint, as removing them

may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment

The car should only be washed in special

wash bays. These places ar

e prepared to

prevent oily water from getting into the

public drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-

tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual

components of the v

ehicl

e can be check

ed in

the following tables. The contents should be

understood merely as a recommendation. Go

to your specialised workshop if you have

221

Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.

e he gener

al considerations into account

›››

in Take special care with... on

page 225.

Exterior cleaning

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with clean-

ing pr

oduct which does not

contain solvents

Camera lenses - soft cloth with

cleaning product with no alco-

hol content

Snow/ice

Hand brush/Anti frost spray

with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water

Brake abrasion

dust

Acid-free special cleaning

product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-

uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, if a

steel cleaning pr

oduct is re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Paint

Problem Solution

Flaws in the paint

Check the paint's colour code

in an authorised service and re-

stor

e with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rust

tank

Apply rust remo

ver and then

apply hard wax. Go you your

specialised w

orkshop if you

have any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion

Have your specialised work-

shop take car

e of this

The water does

not create dr

op-

lets on the clean

paint

Maintain with hard wax (at

least 2 times a year)

No shine de-

spite sober main-

tenance/paint

reat with suitable wax and ap-

ply paint preservativ

e after-

wards if the wax used does not

contain preservative ingredi-

ents

Tanks, e.g. insect

remains, bird

oppings, tree

sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water

and remove with a microfibre

cloth

Fat-based dirt,

e.g. cosmetic

products or

sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-

tral soap solution

and a soft

cloth

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-

ted parts

››

›

page 220

222

Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap

solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and

then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution

, if pos-

sible solvent-free plastic clean-

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal

display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with

neutral soap solution

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution

, al-

wed to dry before retracting

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Dirt particles ad-

hered to the sur

face

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee

, tea,

blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutral

soap solution

Problem Solution

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solution

Absorb the dissolved grease

and paint particles drying with

an absorbent cloth, in case you

must treat it with water after-

wards

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

Special st

ain remove: dry with

an absorbent cloth, if applica-

ble, apply neutral soap solution

afterwards

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litr

e of w

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap

solution

Water-based dirt,

e.g. coffee, tea,

blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

Dry stains: leather cleaner

Grease-based

dirt, e.g. oil, mak

up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth

and leather cleaner

Dry stains: grease dissolving

spray

Special dirt, e.g.

pens, nail polish,

dispersion paint,

shoe cream etc.

ain remover suitable for

leather

223

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-

larly to pr

otect from sunlight.

Use a colour preservative if re-

quired

Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in

1 litre of wat

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights

●

Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with

a dry cl

oth or sponge

●

Do not use cl

eaning products that contain

alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels

●

Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive

products.

●

If the protective coating on the paint of the

rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,

scratches, etc., the damage should be re-

paired immediately.

Camera lenses

●

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice

or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of

cracking the lens!

●

To clean the camera lens, never use abra-

sive cleaning products or products with alco-

hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows

●

Remove snow and ice from windows and

exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To

avoid scratches, the scraper should only be

pushed in one direction and not moved to

and fro.

●

Never remove snow or ice from windows

and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.

Risk of cracks on the windows!

●

To prevent damage to the heating of the

rear window, do not put stickers over the

heating elements.

Covers/trims

●

Do not use cleaning products or chrome

based cleaning agents.

Paint

●

The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust

before applying wax or care products. Risk of

scratches!

●

Do not apply wax or care products if the

vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of

damaging the paint job!

●

The ambient rust deposits must not be re-

moved through friction. Risk of damaging the

paint job!

●

Remove cosmetic products and sunlight

immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel

●

The screens, the instrument panel and the

trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of

scratches!

●

Make sure that the instrument panel is

switched off and cooled down before clean-

ing.

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks between the

instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-

age!

Control panels

●

Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-

trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts

●

Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.

●

Seat belts and their components must nev-

er be cleaned with chemical products, nor

should they be allowed to come into contact

with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-

jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!

●

If you find any damage to the belt webbing,

belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,

ask your specialised workshop to replace the

belt in question.

224

Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-

●

Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara

eather with l

eather cl

eaning products, sol-

vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers

or similar products.

●

If the stain is very hard to remove, take the

vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it

removed there. This will prevent damage.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage

the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro

fasteners are closed.

Natural leather

●

Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,

spot removers or similar products on leather.

●

Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-

ets or belts can damage the surface.

●

Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard

sponges, etc. to clean.

●

Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the

seats.

●

Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for

long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose

some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best to

cover the leather.

WARNING

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the

windscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid w

eather, darkness or when

the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may

be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-

ings can also cause the windscreen wiper

blades to make noise.

Note

●

Remains of insects can be remo

ved much

more easily with previously treated paint.

●

Regular car care treatments can prevent

deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationary

or a l

ong period of time

, contact a qualified

workshop. They will gladly inform you about

the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-

sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regarding

the vehicle's battery

›››

page 204.

225

Information for the user

Inf

ormation f

or the user

Inf

ormation stored in control

units

Description and operation

Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a ser-

ies of electronic contr

ol units responsible for

the engine and gearbox management. In ad-

dition, the control units supervise the per-

formance of the exhaust gas system and the

airbag systems.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,

these electronic control units are continuous-

ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event of

faults or deviations from the theoretical val-

ues, only this data is stored. Normally, the

warning lamps on the instrument panel light

up in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed us-

ing special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialised

workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored

data may include:

●

Data relating to the engine or the gearbox

●

Speed

●

Direction of trav

●

Braking force

●

Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conver-

sations held by passengers in the vehicle.

In vehicles equipped with an emergency call

function via the mobile phone or other appli-

ances connected in the vehicle, it is possible

to send the vehicle position. If the control unit

records an accident with airbag activation,

the system may automatically send a signal.

This will depend on the network operator.

Normally, transmission is only possible in

areas with good coverage.

Event Data Recorder

The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-

corder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores the

vehicle information. Therefore, in the event of

an accident, it is possible to obtain detailed

information about how the accident occur-

red. Vehicles with airbag systems can store

data relating to impact speed, seat belt sta-

tus, seat positions and airbag activation times

may be stored, etc. The volume of data de-

pends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mounted

with authorisation from the vehicle owner

and, in some countries, they are governed by

local legislation.

Reprogramming control units

On the whole, all the data required for the

component management is stored in the

control units. The programming of certain

convenience functions, such as the turn sig-

nals, individual door opening and instructions

on the display can be modified using special

equipment at the workshop. If the comfort

functions are reprogrammed, the information

and Instruction Manual descriptions will not

coincide with the modified functions. There-

fore, SEAT recommends that any modifica-

tions be recorded in the section “Other work-

shop notes” in the Maintenance Programme.

The SEAT Official Service must have a record

of any modification to the programming.

Reading the vehicle fault memory

There is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-

cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-

ory. The fault memory documents errors and

deviations from the theoretical values of the

electronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driver side

footwell area, next to the lever for opening

the bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read and

reset by a specialised workshop.

226

Information for the user

Other important information

Intr

oduction

WARNING

Failure to treat the vehicle with the correct

care increases the risk of accident and in-

jury.

●

Observ

e legal requirements.

●

Observe the Instruction Manual.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is not properly cared for,

damage may occur.

●

Observe l

egal requirements.

●

Carry out regular maintenance of the ve-

hicle, according to specifications in the

Maintenance Programme.

●

Observe the Instruction Manual.

Labels and plates

Fig. 192

Warnings relating to handling of the

Cit

y Saf

y Assist system laser sensor function.

Some parts in the engine compartment come

om the f

act

ory with certificates of safety, la-

bels or plates containing important informa-

tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, for

example, on the fuel tank flap, on the pas-

senger's sun visor, on the driver door strut, or

on the floor of the boot.

●

Never remove these certificates of safety,

labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in

good condition and are legible.

●

If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of

safety, label or plate, is replaced, the special-

ised workshop should attach the information

back in the same place.

Certificate of safety

A certificate of safety on the door strut states

that all the safety standards and regulations

established by the national traffic authorities

responsible for road safety were met at the

time of manufacture. It may also give the

month and year of manufacture, together

with the chassis number.

Warning of high voltage label

There is a label close to the bonnet lock

which warns of high voltage in the vehicle's

electrical system.

Warning relating to the City Safety Assist

system laser sensor

There are some warning and information

signs on the City Safety Assist system laser

sensor

›››

Fig. 192.

Using your vehicle in other coun-

tries and continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for

use in a particul

ar country in accor

dance

with the national l

egislation in force at the

time of manufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country or

used in another country for an extended peri-

od of time, the applicable legislation of that

country should be observed.

227

Information for the user

It may be necessary to fit or remove certain

pieces of equipment or t

o deactiv

e certain

functions. Service work may also be affected.

This is particularly true if the vehicle is used in

a different climate for an extended period of

time.

CAUTION

●

SEAT does not accept liability for any

damage t

o the vehicle due to the use of a

lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or

the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

●

SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi-

cle does not comply in part or in full with

the legal requirements of other countries or

continents.

Radio and antenna reception

For factory-fitted radio equipment, the aerial

or r

adio r

eception is fitted to the roof of the

vehicle.

Note

If electrical equipment such as mobile tele-

phones, is used near a roof aerial, you may

observe int

erference in the reception of AM

stations.

Notes on SEAT repairs

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not per-

formed correctly may r

esult in damage or

errors in the vehicle operation, affecting

the effectiveness of the driver assist and

airbag systems. This could result in serious

accident.

●

Have any repairs or modifications carried

out at a specialised workshop.

Conformity certification

The respective manufacturer hereby de-

es that the pr

oducts indicated below

comply with basic requirements and the fol-

lowing provisions and important legislation on

the date of manufacture of the vehicle,

among others FCC Part 15.19, FCC Part 15.21

and RSS-Gen Issue 1:

Radio frequency equipment

●

Electronic gearbox lock.

●

Vehicle key

Electrical equipment

●

12 volt power socket

Collection and scrapping of end-

of-life vehicles

Collection of end-of-life vehicles

SEAT is already prepar

ed for the moment

when you wish to scrap your vehicle and of-

fers you an environmentally-friendly solution.

An extensive network of used car reception

centres already exists in much of Europe. Af-

ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re-

ceive a certificate of destruction describing

the environmentally friendly scrapping of the

vehicle in accordance with applicable legis-

lation.

We will collect the used vehicle free of

charge, provided it complies with all national

legislation.

Please see your technical service for further

information about the collection and scrap-

ping of end-of-life vehicles.

Scrapping

The relevant safety requirements must be ob-

served when the vehicle or components of

the airbag or belt tensioner systems are

scrapped. These requirements are known to

specialised workshops.

228

Information for the user

Recycling of electrical or electron-

ic de

vices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that

are not permanently fitted in the v

ehicle must

be marked with the following symbol:



This symbol indicates that EED must not be

discarded as home waste but through selec-

tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-

rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance decl

ara-

tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-

ces. The manuf

act

ers of these devices de-

clare that they comply with Directive

2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declaration

is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo



Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you to

associate the name of the device in the dec-

aration of compliance with the features of

the vehicle and the terminology used in the

on-board documentation.

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radiofrequency re-

mote control (v

ehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,

FS94

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxili-

ary heat

er)

Sender STH SEAT -

50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-

tem

MQB-B B

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Radar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRR

evo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-

ernal antenna of the

car

TS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated in

dashboard module

instrument cluster

229

Information for the user

Features of the

vehicle

Name of the de

vice

according to the dec-

laration of compli-

ance

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Big

family

Antennas KSA Small F

am III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG

720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Ant

enna amplifiers 6F0.035.225

6F9.

035.

225

3V5.

035.577.A

7N0.035.552.J

7N0.035.552.K

7N0.035.552.Q

5F4.035.225

5F4.035.225.A

5F4.035.225.B

5F9.035.225

5F9.035.225.A

5F9.035.225.B

575.035.225

575.035.225.A

575.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all

rele

vant components must include the ad-

dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-

nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot

include a sticker are listed below, as long as it

is legally required:

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radiofrequency remote

control key

Hell

a KGaA Hueck & Co.

Rixbecker Straße 75

59552 Lippst

adt,

GERMANY

Radio frequency re-

mote control (auxiliary

heat

er)

Digades gmbH

Äußere Weberstr

aße 20

02763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &

Comfort SE

Friedrichshafener Str

. 9

82205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectrical

equipment fitted

in the vehicl

Addresses of the

manufacturers

Radar sensors for as-

sistance systems

ADC Aut

omotive Distance

Control Systems GmbH

eter-Dornier-Straße 10

88131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbH

Postfach 16 61

1226 Leonberg,

GERMANY

230

Information for the user

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

Bluethooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Radar sensors for assistance systems

76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

231

Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipment

Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

232

Technical features

Technical data

echnical f

eat

ures

Important information

Introduction

The information in the vehicle documentation

always t

akes precedence over the informa-

tion in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this

documentation are valid for the standard

model in Spain.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models, for special vehicles and for

other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-

fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly

used to denote engine po

wer.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Cetane number, indication of the die-

sel combustion power

RON

Research octane number, indication of

the knock resistance of petr

ol.

Vehicle identification data

Fig. 193 Vehicle identification number.

Vehicle identification number

The v

ehicl

e identification number (chassis

number) can be r

ead from outside the vehicle

through a viewer in the windscreen

›››

Fig. 193. This viewer is located in the lower

part of the windscreen. The vehicle identifica-

tion number (chassis number) is also stam-

ped on the right water drain channel. The wa-

ter drain channel is located between the sus-

pension tower and the wing. Open the bonnet

to read the vehicle identification number .

Specific vehicle weight information

The instructions in the official vehicle docu-

ments t

e pr

ecedence. All the technical da-

ta provided in this documentation is applica-

ble to the basic model.

The figures may be different depending

whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-

ferent models and for special vehicles.

Kerb weight values shown in the following ta-

ble apply to a vehicle with driver (75 kg), liq-

uids including a fuel tank 90% full, in addition

to tools and a spare wheel

›››

. The kerb

eight indicat

ed incr

eases with optional

equipment and retrofitting of accessories,

while proportionally reducing carrying ca-

pacity.

The load is equivalent to the following

weights:

●

Passengers.

●

Total equipment.

233

Technical data

●

oof l

oad, included in the carrier

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised weight

and the load on the axles coul

d cause

damage to the vehicle, accidents and seri-

ous injuries.

●

The real load on the axles should never

exceed the maximum permitted.

●

The load and its distribution in the vehicle

have effects on the vehicle handling and

the braking ability. Always drive at a suita-

ble speed.

CAUTION

Distribute the load as uniformly and as low

down on the vehicl

e as possible. When

transporting heavy objects in the luggage

compartment, these should be placed as

far forward as possible or over the rear axle

to have as little influence on handling as

possible.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived

om measur

ements perf

ormed or supervised

by certified EU laboratories, according to the

legislation in force at the time (for more infor-

mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-

ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and

apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and

emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-

cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO

emissions de-

pend on the equipment/features of each indi-

vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,

road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-

mental conditions, load or number of passen-

gers.

Note

In practice, and considering all the factors

mentioned here, consumption v

alues can

differ from those calculated in the current

European regulations.

Wheels

e pr

essure, snow chains and

wheel bolts

Tyre pressure

The stick

er with the t

e pressure values can

be found on the back of the left front door

frame

›››

page 209. The tyre pressure values

given there are for cold tyres. Do not reduce

the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres

›››

Sno

w chains

Sno

w chains may be fitt

ed only to the front

wheels.

Consult section

›››



page 42, Snow

chains.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the

tightening torque of the wheel bolts should

be checked as soon as possible with a torque

wrench

›››

. The tightening torque for steel

and all

oy wheel

s is

110 Nm.

WARNING

●

Check the tyre pr

essure at least once per

month. Checking the tyre pressure is very

important. If the tyre pressure is too high or

too low, there is an increased danger of ac-

cidents - particularly at high speeds.

●

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts

is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-

cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheel

bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note

We recommend that you ask your Techni-

cal Service for information about appr

opri-

ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

234

Technical features

Engine data

etr

ol engines

1.0 MPI

Ecomotive

1.0 MPI

art-Stop

Ecomotive

1.0 MPI

Start-Stop

1.0 MPI

Start-Stop

Ecomotive

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 44 (60)/5,000-6,000 55 (75)/6,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 95/3,000-4,300 95/3,000-4,300

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual automatic manual manual manual automatic manual manual

Top speed (km/h) 161 (4) 161 (4) 161 (4) 161 (4) 172 (4) 172 (4) 172 (4) 172 (4)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (sec-

onds)

9.1 10.9 9.1 10.9 8.7 10.1 8.7 10.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-

onds)

14.4 16.7 14.4 16.7 13.5 14.9 13.5 14.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,320 1,330 1,330 1,330 1,330 1,300 1,330 1,330

Weight in running order (with driver)

926 937 934 940 928 931 936 936

Maximum authorised weight on front

axle (kg)

680 680 680 680 680 680 680 680

Maximum authorised weight on rear

axle (kg)

640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640

235

Technical data

Natural gas / petrol engines

1.0 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 50 (68)/6,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 90/3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm

) 3/999

Fuel

CNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual

Top speed (km/h) 164 (4)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 10.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 16.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,380

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,033

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 680

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 640

236

Technical features

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 194 Dimensions.

Mii

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 595/542

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,420

D Length (mm) 3,557

E/F Front/rear

track width (mm) 1,428/1,4

G Width (mm) 1,645

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,478

Turning radius (m) approx. 9.8

This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

237

Index

Abr

oad

ended stay abroad with your vehicle . . . 227

sale of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

ABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Acoustic alarm

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

seat belt unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Adjust

front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Adjusting

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 112

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Adjusting the head restraints

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Advice for driving

spare wheel or temporary spare wheel . . . . 213

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 60

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 63

functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

locking the vehicle after deployment . . . . . . . 95

repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 129

instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

water under vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 228

Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Anti-lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 73

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 73

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

do not use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Aspects to take into account before starting

the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Assistance systems

brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

electronic differential lock (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . 158

optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 173

safety Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

traction control (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Assist systems

traction control (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Audible warning

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Automatic belt retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Automatic device disconnection

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Automatic gearbox

driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

ignition key removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

starting on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

stopping on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Automatic gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

AUX-IN multimedia source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Bag support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

BAS

see Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Battery

changing in the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Battery acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

239

Index

Belt tension device

service and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt t

ensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 193

Brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

running in new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 156

Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Braking

brake assistance system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Bulb fault

See "Changing bulbs" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

windscreen washer liquid reservoir . . . . . . . . 202

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

CCS

see cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Central locking system

after airbag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 72

subsequent tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

side turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

automatic gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

engaging the gears (automatic gearbox) . 160

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Changing the blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Child safety seat

securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 67

Child seats

disabling the front passenger front airbag . . 17

ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 69

mounting child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

on the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 66

Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 67

weight categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

City safety assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

City Safety Assist function

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Cleaning

Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224

control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

240

Index

special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

the r

adio scr

een . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223

trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223

washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Climatronic

adjusting the temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

AUTO (automatic mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

cooling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

removing ice from windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

switch off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Clothes hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Coming Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Sunglasses storage compartment . . . . . . . . . 117

Conformity certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

City Safety Assist function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

engine oil sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

for the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

hill hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

indication of brake pad wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

locking the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190, 191

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 101

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Coolant

checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Cooling system

checking the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

topping up with coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Correct sitting position

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 171

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Dangers in not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Data registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Data storage during the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Diagnostics connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Direction of rotation

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Disabling the front passenger front airbag . . . . 17

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89

Disposal

belt tension device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Emergency closing or opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

241

Index

Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Centr

e consol

e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

119

Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Driving

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

fuel level too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

starting on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

stopping on a slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

through salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Driving abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Driving in winter

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

traces of salt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Driving tips

For a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Dust filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

EDS

see "Brake assist system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Electrical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 121

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

see Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 43

fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Emergency closing or opening

driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Emergency unlocking

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Emission control system

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Engine

assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

12 Volt sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 193

battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 202

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 200

coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 198

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 197

windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 34, 201

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

242

Index

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 195

changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

195

checking oil l

vel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 197

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Environment

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Environmental

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Environmental tips

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Exterior mirrors

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Exterior rear view mirrors

control of the function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8

Fabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Fault

parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 174

Fault memory

connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 191

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

First-aid kit

storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 63

Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Front seats

manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

manually adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Front wiper blades

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 186

ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Fuel gauge

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Fuel tank cap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fuel tank flap

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 78

fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

changing gears manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

manual gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

putting the vehicle in gear (manual gear-

box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

General instrument panel

instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 106

Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . 56

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Headlights

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Head rest

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Head restraints

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

243

Index

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31

Heating and fr

esh air

contr

s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Heating and fresh air system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Heating of the rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31

Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Hill hold

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Hubcaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Ice

removing from the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31

Identification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Identifying letter on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

see "Engine and ignition" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

removal lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

seat belt status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Infotainment system

introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Infotainment System

adjusting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

anti-theft password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

AUX-IN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

change the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

changing station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Drive Mii App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

general considerations about operation . . . 137

general equipment panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 136

Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

mobile phone connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

phone calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

power management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

saving stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

tune station frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 89

general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Interior rear vision mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Interior view

left-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

ISOFIX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 70, 72

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Keys

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 95, 97

vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Labels and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Laser sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Leaving Home Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Lift platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

244

Index

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 103

audibl

e w

arnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103

AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

light controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

parking light remains on both sides . . . . . . . . 104

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Load compartment in the luggage compart-

ment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 122

general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

transporting the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 122

driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Loading the vehicle

class N1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Locking and unlocking

in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 99, 122

closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

luggage compartment variable floor . . . . . . 125

manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Seat Mii 2018

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Seat MII 2018 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Klarstein 52046250 Lil'Loo removable children's toilet seat

Maxi-Cosi VB024OXPE Oxford Modular Stroller with 180° Rotating Infant Seat for Versatile Travel

Maxi-Cosi VB023OXMI Oxford Modular Stroller with Mico Pro Infant Car Seat in Black

Maxi-Cosi VB022OXAM Oxford Modular Stroller with Ambra Ultra-Lightweight Infant Car Seat for Easy Travel and Convenience

Maxi-Cosi Andi 360° Rotating All-in-One Convertible Car Seat with Vehicle Seat Protector Features Safety and Comfort

Vevor XF8W217 Shop Stool Adjustable Garage Seat 300 lbs Load with Backrest & Wheels